Prakritadhyaya

Author(s): Kramdishwar, Satyaranjan Banerjee, Dalsukh Malvania, H C Bhayani
Publisher: Prakrit Text Society Ahmedabad
Catalog link: https://jainqq.org/explore/001368/1

Page #1

Prakrit Text Series
No. 22
PRAKRTADHYĀYA
KRAMADIS VARA
Edited by
Dr. Satya Ranjan Banerjee M'A., D.Phil. (Calcutta), Ph.D. (Edinburgh)
PRAKRIT TEXT SOCIETY
AHMEDABAD-380 009
1980

Page #2

PRAKRIT TEXT SERIES No. 22
General Editors D. D. Malvania H. C. Bhayani
Prākrtādhyāya
(THE PRĀKĘTA BOOK OF THE SAMKȘIPTASĀRA )
by
Kramadiśvara
Edited by Dr. Satya Ranjan Banerjee M.A., D. Phil. (Calcutta), Ph.D. (Edinburgh)
PRAKRIT TEXT SOCIETY AHMEDABAD-380009.
1980

Page #3

Published by Dalsukh Malvania Secretary, Prakrit Text Society L.D. Institute of Indology, Ahmedabad-380009.
First Edition 1980
Price Rs. 5/
Printed by Mahanth Tribhuvandas Shastri Sree Ramanand Printing Press Kankaria Road Ahmedabad-380022

Page #4

प्राकृत अन्य परिषद्, अन्थाङ्क-२२
संक्षिप्तसारगतः प्राकृताध्यायः
क्रमदीश्वरकृतः
संपादकः टो. सत्य रंजन बेनरजी
एम.ए.,डी.फिल. (कलकत्ता), पीएच.डी.(एडिन्बर्ग)
प्राकृत ग्रन्थ परिषद्
अहमदाबाद १९८०

Page #5

Page #6

GENERAL EDITOR'S FOREWORD
The eighth book of Kramadīśvara's Samkşiptasára is devoted to Prakrit. It has its value as a text belonging to the Eastern School of Prakrit. grammarians. Dr. Banerjee has given us here for the first time an edition of the Prākstadhyāya of the Samkşiptasära that is based on all the available manuscripts of the text. He has also consulted the earlier printed editions. In presenting the Sütras he has indicated parallels from the works of other Eastern grammarians ard from Hemacandra's Prakrit grammar. Thus he has given us a
axt that is carefully based on the available mansucript evidence, is against the text in the earlier uncritical and careless edit the present state of the available materials, there is very little that can be further reliably achieved in the matter of establishing the text.
It is however obvious that the resulting text is far from satisfactory and this is so because all the available manuscripts of the Prakrit book of the Samkşiptasära, agreeing very closely among themselves (as noted by Dr. Banerjee), derive from a prototype that appears to have been considerably incorrect and defective. Consideration of a few doubtful places in the Apabbramsa section will easily bring out this point.
• Under 5, 5 we read mūka vadha. But cumpare Siddhahema (=SH.), 8, 4, 422 (13) : müdhasya nālia-vaờhaul and the illustrations under 402, 422(4).
With sangha sahu compare SH. 8, 4, 366 : sarvasya sāho vå, and the illustration under 4, 422(16).
Under 5, 7 we read nūnam ņada nada năvai. Compare SH. 8, 4, 444 which notes nam, nau, nāi, nāvai and jaņi in the sense of
1 Under SH, 4, 2, 174 vadhah vadho is obviously incorrect for mūdhah
vadho.

Page #7

6
iva (i.e. as particles of comparison). In jaḍāso taḍāso (under 5, 113) for jaiso taiso also i is similarly misread as ḍā.
Under 5, 13 kimpa seems to stand for kimva.
5. 14 treats diminutive suffixes. Compare SH. 8, 4, 429 and ff.
In gähuli -ula- is the diminutive suffix. Compare gāhulī (Deśīnămamālā 2, 89) derived from gāha-(Sk.grāha-) and sāhuli (SH. 4, 2. 174) derived from sahā (Sk. sākhā.).
Besides the diminutive sense, these suffixes have other shades also, e.g. grief or depression (kheda-). This is illustrated by hiaḍā (derived from hiaa- with the diminutive suffix -da-) in hiaḍā phuṭṭi (cf. SH. 8, 4, 357(3): hiaḍa phuṭṭi tada-tti kari etc., where hiaḍā means 'O poor heart'). Under 5, 22 and 5, 30 it is said that vai means vāri 'water'. This is very much suspect. Such a word is quite unknown. The expected forms are vāriem, vārim etc.
Under 5, 40, aim quite obviously stands for maim. Compare SH. 1, 4, 377.
Under 5, 41 lahatum and lahevvatum seem to stand for lahaum and lahevvaum respectively.
Under 5, 48 tūņa is given as an abstract noun forming suffix. This should be obviously ttana (Compare SH. 8, 4, 437. The commentary gives a form with the suffix - ttana as an option for one with the suffix -ppana).
Under 5 67 we read śeşo nagare vāsakādau. Here the last word should read rasakādau (Nitti-Dolci reads so: see Prakrit Grammarians, p. 150). As the metres like Doha were characteristic of the compositions in the Vracaḍa variety of Apabhramsa, so the metres like Rasaka were characteristic of Nagara Apabhramsa.2
2 Ratnaśrījñāna in his commentary on Dandin's Kavyalak şana, 1, 37 has mentioned Rasaka as one of the characteristic literary forms or metres of Apabhramsa. See Thakur and Jha, Kavyalak ṣaṇa, 1957, p. 25.

Page #8

Among the 'Deśya' expressions (dešokti) listed under 5, 96 bappe (1), puttare3 (2) and mārive (3) should be possibly buppa etc. i.e. ending in a, and mariva is an obvious corruption of mārisa. amho, amhi, amha (8) stand for ammo, ammi, amma respectively. Among the particles expressing ironical surprise (16) maru (morphologically, imperative second person singular of mar- to die'; cf. Mod. Guj. mare expressing, inter alia, fond admiration under the ruse of a curse), uha ('look !) and māri (=imperative second person singular of the causative mār: cf. Hindi mär dālā, Guj. māryā or mărī nākhyå used metaphorically in a comparable sense) are, like several other expreesions in the list, to be taken as idioms or fixed phrases used metaphorically. je and ji are said to be ivārthe. But they are always used as emphatic and not comparative particles. So the correct reading should be evărthe. Compare SH. 8, 4, 420.
There is some obvious textual confusion in the expressions listed under 5. 96 (23). The end portion should constitute one separate item : kalla-kalli hyastana-svastanayoḥ. What precedes this seems to be quite different, having no connection with the meanings 'yesterday' and 'tomorrow'.
Under 5, 96(32) we read vissaha-vițāņo gļhasamparkayoḥ. Here viļāņo stands for visžalo. Comparc aspršyasamsargasya vitýālaḥ under SH. 4. 8. 422 and its illustration. The fact is that the whole section called Deśísāra seems to have numerous corruptions.
Finally in the illustration given under 5, 113 jadāso and tadaso are, as already pointed out, obvious corruptions for jaiso, taiso Compare SH, 8, 4, 403.
It is thus quite clear that in the available manuscripts of the Pråkstādhyāya, the Apabhraíśa portion is very badly preserved.
Incidentally, it is to be observed that as we find several groups of Sutras with the same internal sequence (and at times with the same illustrations) commonly shared by the Apabhramśa portion of Kramadišvara's Prāk stādhyāya and that of Hemacandra's Prakrit grammar, 3 cf. the slang expression pattar in Modern Gujarati, 4 See for example Prākytādhyāya, 5, 48 to 52 and SH. 8, 4, 437 to 44
and the illustrated forms daiena, daiem, aggień, aggin, aggina, dholla, hiadā etc. commonly given in both of them.

Page #9

8
we are led to believe that they must have used some identical earlier source for their treatment of Apabhramsa.
But till we come across some better manuscript preserving the original text more faithfully, we shall have to be satisfied with the text painstakingly set up by Dr. Banerjee. The Prakrit Text Society is grateful to him for having kindly edited the text on their behalf.

H. C. Bhayani

Page #10

INTRODUCTION
1. Earlier Studies on Kramadis'vara's
Prakrit grammar
$1. Christian Lassen was the first scholar, so far known to us, who had utilised from a manuscript in Paris the Prākrit grammar in the Sanksiptasära of Kramadīśvara in his Institutiones Linguae Pracriticast published in the year 1837. Two years later, Nicolas Dalius had also utilised the same manuscript and appended the 'dhatvādeśa' portion of Kramadiśvara's Prākrit grammar to his Radices Pracriticae, Bonnae Ad Rhenum in 1639, which is regarded as a supplement to Lisson's Institutiones. Though Kramadīśvara's granmar was utilisei by these two scholars as early as 1837.39, yet they did not seem to have attached much value to his work. It was Cowell who had practically for the first time announced the proper worth of Kramadīsvara's Prakrit grammar which is of great value in correcting Vararuci's text'. * Cowell said that many difficult and obscure passages of Vararuci's Präkrta-prakāśa could be made clear, if Kramadiśvara were properly consulted. Cowell really understood the value of Kramadīśvara, a fact which has strongly been emphasized by Grierson many years later.
§ 2. It was also reported by Cowell that & text of the Prākrit Grammar of Kramadīśvara was in the process of editing by Rajendralal Mitra, for the Bibliotheca Indica, of the Asiatic Society of Bengal, but 'fortunately for his reputation', says Grierson, it was never published. The date of its printing is not known, but, as Grierson? informs us it was probably somewhere about the year 1870 (?). He also says that it has just the value of not a very good manuscript. Later
1) P. 16. He has consulted the commentary of Candidevaśarma, vide my L infra ($10) for detailed analysis. 2) P. 10 (fn.1). 3) Cowell's edition of Prakrataprakāśa, 1868, p. XII. 4) "It is with no small pleasure that I have seen, among the publications of the Bengal Asistic Society, which are annouced as in progress an edition of the Prāksta portion (of Kramadiśvara), by Babu Rajendralal Mitra"-Jowell's Prakrtaprakāśa, p. XII. 5) The Prākṣta-Dhatu.ideśa etc, Calcutta, 1924, p. 79. 6) H. P. Šāstrī's Des. Cat. (VI), 1931, p. 1xv. 7) Ibid, p. 79.

Page #11

CRITICAL APPARATUS
on, a new edition of the eighth pada of Kramadīśvara s Prākrit Grammar was printed in Caloutta in 1886, but that was also a very bad and uncritical edition. Since then it has attracted the attention of many scholars ; and lastly, Grierson had laid down strong stress on the importance of this work and remarked that this Prākrit grammar of Kramadīśvara would be found useful for 'controlling or substantiating the statement of other writers'. He did not edit any portion of it, but utilised the 'dhatvādeśa' portion of his Prākrit grammar from Delius's Radices. That a critical edition of Kramadiśvara's Prakytādhyāya has long been a desideratum is expressed by all these scholars. The present work is an humble attempt for the first time to improve considerably upon the existing text of Kramadīśvara, with the help of the manuscripts collated by me. 2. Critical Apparatus and Text-Constitution
I. Critical Apparatus $ 3. This editio princeps of Kramadīśvara's Prakrit grammar called "Prākrtādhyāya" with the Vrtti is based on the following material the description of which is given below :
(i) Manuscripts A=This stands for the country-made paper manuscript written in Bengali character, belonging to the Asiutic Society, Calcutta, and noticed by H. P. Šāstri in his Descriptive Catalogue of Sanskrit Manuscripts in the Asiatic Society, Vol. VI (grammar), 1931. p. 180, item No. 4495, MS. No. G. 694. The description, given there, is as follows:
"Substance, country-made paper. 15 x 31 inches. Folia, 27. Lines 5, 6 on a page. Extent in Slokas, 436. Character, Bengali,
Appearance, tolerable. Complete". Out of these 27 folios, the Prākrit portion runs only upto the 22nd folio, the remaining folios being for the metres and rhetorios. On the first page of the folio (i.e.,la), some other things, which are not connected with the text, are written. The analysis of the Prākrit portion can briefly be stated thus :
1) Vide my printed material P infra ($ 14) for the analysis of the printed editions of Kramadīśvara's Prākrit grammar. 2) Grierson, Ibid, p. 79.

Page #12

INTRODUCTION
1b-3b-The first chapter--Svara-kāryam nivṛttam.
3b-9a-The Second chapter-Consonants with conjuncts.
9a-12a-The Third chapter-Declension.
12a-15b-The Fourth chapter-Conjugation (with Dhatvadesas). 15b-22a-The Fifth chapter-Apabhramsarambhaḥ,
Excepting the first and the last, there is no chapter-mark. At the end, it is written
faaraqìsof ardizz: qåurfa-tza: afq: 1
चक्रपाणितो ज्यायान् नप्तासौ श्रीपतेः कृती ॥

3
इति वादीन्द्र चक्रचूडामणि महापण्डित - श्रीक्रमदीश्वरकृतौ संक्षिप्तसारे रसवत्यां at difa-qıerfear gışaıràa fgátutse: 1 ॐ दुर्गा शरणम् ॥
The marginal glosses of the manuscript are generally the Prakrit renderings of some Sanskrit words, classed as "akṛtigana" and vice-versa. The ink used for the text is black, while some lines are marked with a red pencil, probably by the compiler of the catalogues. The manuscript is complete and is in a good condition. The handwriting of this manuscript is almost uniform and clear it is sometimes written in a small size, and sometimes in a big size, as a sequel to which the lines in each page vary from 4 to 6. It is also carefully written save for some slight mistakes common to the other manuscripts consulted and collated by me. It has some scribal errors, here and there, which arise sometimes out of orthographical similarity in the Bengali script of the 17th and 18th centuries A. D., and sometimes owing to the ignorance of the copyist. These errors are quite negligible, and could easily be corrected with the aid of other manuscripts. The manuscript bears no date.
§ 4. B This manuscript in Bengali character, which has been preserved in the Vangiya Sahitya Parişat Library, Calcutta, bearing the number, Sanskrit 287, contains 15 folios written on both sides of the country-made paper, the first folio and the last being blank. Its measurement is 19 by 5 inches. It is complete and contains the textual portions of Prakrit, Chandah and Alankaras only. The ink used for the manuscript is black. In the margin, some notes, such as, the evolution of Sanskrit sounds (a>a, i, u, etc.) are found; and it is clear from the scholia that the hand-writing of the marginal notes is quite different

1

Page #13

CRITICAL APPARATORS
from that of the body of the text and belongs to some other goribe of later times. Furthermore, in between the lines and also in the margin some corrections were made by a different hand: otherwise the hand-writing of this manuscript is uniform and clear. It has no marginal glosses as in other manuscripts. It does neither mention the name of the copyist, nor the date of its writing ; but judging from the general appearance of the hand-writing, the age of the manuscript might be assigned to the close of the 18th or the beginning of the 19th century A.D. It is interesting to note that somebody might have used
manuscript in recent times, as some Eaglish words (although very few) are found in the margin. It omits many sūtras, orttis and words. It also indicates the sign of incorrect representation of a sūtra or vrtti by putting a cross sign (x) over the margin. This has been made, I think, by the scribe. The manuscript has 9-12 lines in & page. The Prākrit grammar runs upto the 12th folio of the manuscript, while the rest are devoted to metres and rhetorica. The first page of the folio (i.e., 1a) though originally kept blank, shows the contents of the manuscript, (probably prepared by some other hand),. which are not always correct. The brief analysis is as follows:
lb-2b=The First chapter=Svara-kāryanya nivȚttam. 2b-5b=The Second chapter=Consonants with conjuncts. 5b-7b=The Third chapter=Declension 7b-9b=The Fourth chapter=Conjugation (with Dhātvādegas). 9b-12b = The Fifth chapter=Apabhramśārambhah.
Excepting the first and the last, there is no chapter-mark. It begins with" ओं नमो गणेशाय and ends with
faarautsaif atatag: getim fa-face: #fa: 1
चक्रपाणिसुतो ज्यायान् नप्तासौ श्रीपतेः कृती ॥ इति वादीन्द्र-चक्रचूडामणि-महापण्डित-श्रीक्रमदीश्वरकृतौ संक्षिप्तसारे महाराजाधिराज-श्रीमज्जुमर-परिशोधित-वृत्तावष्टमपादः समाप्तः । श्रीकृष्णाय नमः ।।
$ 5. O=This country-made paper manuscript, written in Bengali character, belongs to the University of Calcutta, Sanskrit Department, bearing the number 1226. It has 25 folios, 17 X 34 inches with 5 or 6 lines to a page. In the margin, Prākrit renderings of some Sanskrit words, classed as "ākrtigaņa", of the first, second and the fifth

Page #14

INTRODUCTION
chapters, are found. The hand-writting is clear and uniform with some topographical poouliarities common to a Bengali script. The manuscript is complete, but its condition is not good, as the edges of the manuscript are spoiled and torn ; and here and there some repairs have been made by pasting paper. The manuscript bears the date of its writing; but it is damaged on one numerical point, thus creating some lacunae in the matter of fixing the date of writing of the manuscript. At the end, it gives the Saka era 16 [?] 8: of the four digits the third from the left (which I have put in the square bracket) is illegible, although only a left-side scrap of Bengali zero is visible, from which I conjecture that the digit might be zero. Whatever may be the number, it is pretty certain that of all the manuscripts consulted by me, it is the oldest, and thus, it helps us in correcting and improving some readings of the text. Out of the 25 folios, the Präkrit portion covers upto the 20th folio, while the remaining portions are for the metres and rhetorios. It is written on both sides of the folio, the first and the last pages being filled up with some lines quoted from the works of Kalidāsa, Bhatti and others. It has the following chapterdivisions :• 1b-3a=The First chapter=Svara-kāryam nivrttam.
34-8a = The Second chapter=Consonants with conjuncts. 8a-11b= The Third chapter=Declension. 11b15a=The Fourth chapter=Conjugation (with Dhāt vādeśa). 158 - 208=The Fifth chapter=Apabhramsa.
Excepting the first there is no chapter-mark. It begins with "....... SY H7 f81a127' and ends with the following :
विद्यातपोऽर्थी वादीन्द्रः पूर्वग्रामी द्विजः कविः।
चक्रपाणिसुतो ज्यायान् नसासो श्रीपतेः कृती। इति वादीन्द्र-चक्रचूडामणि-महापण्डित-श्रीक्रमदीश्वरकृतौ संक्षिप्तसारे रसवत्यां वृत्तौ संधि-पादादिना प्राकृतान्तेन द्वितीयोऽध्यायः ।। गुरुचरणेभ्यो नमः। श्रीरस्तु मयि लेखके सदा। यथा दृष्टो यो दि। श्रीरामगोपाल देवशर्मणो लिपिरियं gfF311 71286 (0)51 21a: Fatatal sitout lll One interesting thing that appears from the colophon is that it has been copied from the book of Srī Rāmagopala Devašarmā; but who this Rāmagopāla was, is very difficult to ascertain now-a-days.

Page #15

ORITICAL APPARATUS
$ 6. C=This country-made paper manuscript, written in Bengali character, also belongs to the University of Caloutta and is deposited in the Department of Sanskrit. It bears the No.1308 and measures 15x4 inches. It is in good condition and contains not only the Prākrit portion of the grammar, but also the Sanskrit portion. The whole manuscript is written on both sides, the first and the last pages being blank. Black ink is used for the body of the text. The entire manuscript has 308 folios with different pagination mark for each and every chapter of the grammar. Thus folios 1 – 34 are for Samdhi ; folios 1-65 for Tinanta ; folios 1-36 for Krdanta ; folios 1-51 for Taddhita ; folios 1-20 for Kāraka ; folios 1-31 for Subanta ; folios 2-46 for Samāsa and folios 1-15 for the Prākrit portion, of which again the last five folios are devoted to metres and rhetorice. The Prākrit portion has 5 or 6 lines on a page. In the scholis of this portion, the Prākrit renderings of some Sanskrit words are given. This manuscript is well-preserved and is written in neat and clear hand-writing, though the entire manuscript was copied by two different persons-the Sanskrit portion being written by Sri Nanda Kumar Devaśarmā? and the Prākrit portion by Sri Rāmamaya DavaŚarmā® on different dates which are also mentioned by the scribes. It is also said that it has been copied from the book of Śrī Premacandra Devasarmām Folios 1b-3a are devoted to vowels, written as "Svara-kāryam nivrttam" with some Prākrit renderings in the margin, while folios 3b-7a. are for consonantal changes with conjuncts, folios 7a-11a for declension, folios 11a-14b for conjugation and folios 14b-20a for Apabhramsa and other sub-dialects, with a
1) likhitam Śrī-Nanda-Kumāra-Devašarmanah svā kşaram idam”. This is found after Karaka, Subanta and Samāsa chapters. The style of writing of other portions e.g. Samdhi, Tinanta, Krdanta and Taddhita is a bit different, so it seems to us that those have been copied by different persons. 2) Sri-Rāmamayaśarmanah svāksaram idam pustakam". This is found under Präkrit portion. 3) These two scribes mention their dates of copying the manuscript thus, the Kāraka portion was copied on the 7th of Srāvana, Saka 1756 , Subanta on the 17th of Śrāvana Śaka 1756 (Bengali era 1241); Samāsa on the 7th of Aøvina, Saka 1756 (Bengali era 1241) by Sri Nanda Kumar Devasarmā; while the I'räkrit portion was copied on Saka 1771 by Sri Rāmamaya Devasarmā. 4) Is he the great Pandita Śri Premacandra Tarkavāgisa ? (Śrë Premacandra Deva Sarmanah pustakam).

Page #16

INTRODUOTION
chapter-mark “Apabhramsārambhah". The Prākrit portion opens thus”...om Prāmaḥ, and the concluding portion runs as follows :
'विद्यातपोऽर्थी वादीन्द्रः पूर्वग्रामी द्विजः कविः।
चक्रपाणिसुतो ज्यायान् नप्तासौ श्रीपतेः कृती ॥ इति वादीन्द्र-चक्रचूडामणि-महापण्डित-श्रीक्रमदीश्वरकृतौ संक्षिप्तसारे रसवत्यां वृत्तौ संधिपादादिना प्राकृतान्तेन द्वितीयोध्यायः। श्रीराममयशर्मणः स्वाक्षरमिदं geri 7 11 Peus 11
$ 7. V=This is also a country-made paper manuscript of the University of Viśva-Bhārati, bearing the No. 554. It is only fragmentary and has six folios only. It begins from the eleventh folio and ends with the sixteenth. Details of this portion of the manuscript era as follows :• Folio 118 starts with the line "jjà ityetau vā bhavatah" of the verb-chapter. Then it has the Dhātvādeśa chapter, which begins with" jalpāder jampādiņ" and ends in the middle of 12b.
Folios 125-13a=Deśīsāro nipātaḥ. Folios 13a - 15b= Apabhramsārambhah.
Folio 15b-15b (4thline)= Sauraseni-prākyta saprāk;tamiśra-upanā. gare gathādau.
Folios 15b (last line) - 161=Magadkā prākṣta.
Folioa 16a - 16b=discussion of the sūtra "Sabare sor etvam". It has five or six lines to a page and its size is 163 x 4 inches. It bears neither the date, nor the name of the scribe. But from the general appearance of the Bengali character of this manuscript, it may be conjectured that it was written about some 150 years ago. The commentary (Vștti) of this manuscript fully corresponds to that given in Lassen's Institutiones. So it may be regarded as the commentary of Candide vasarmā.
$ 8. S=This manuscript in Bengali script, found in the Govern. ment Sanskrit College, Calcutta, is complete in 27 folios of country. made paper and is distinotly written in black ink by a modern copyist from some earlier one. It has been collected from Shri J. N. Training School, Majhilpur, 24 Parganas, pear Calcutta. The number of this
1) Reference to this manuscript is found in the Puthi Paricaya (Vol-II) by Sri Pañoánana Mandala, śāntiniketana, 1959, p. 232.

Page #17

ORITICAL APPARATUR
Ms. is Vyākaraņa 565. It was copied in the Bengali year 1316 (=1908 A.D). There are numerous glosses of Prākrit and Sanskrit words. One important feature of this Ms. is that some explanations (=tākā) of some sūtras are found in the margin and these explanations are not found in any of the other manuscripts. All these tīkās are included in the text. Moreover, the beginning of this Ms. is exactly the same as we find it in Lassen's book. It has some new additions also. All these will be found in the beginning of the tikā of this text. This Ms. is no doubt a fair specimen of its class. There are some alight scribal errors in the matter of rendering Sanskrit words into Prākrit; and these matters have not been recorded in the foot-notes as variants. It begins with
eq* aut quote Il cfTcia a and ends with--faraatset aretes:..... alse17: 1A: 1 TEF5717790-980: 979 fuT' F1g? || (27 folio). The Prākrit grammar is upto folio 21a and the first line of 21b.
$ 9. 8.=This country-made paper manuscript, written in almost modern Bengali character, with usual method of topographical peculiarities wbioh can be inferred from the form of the letters and the quality of the paper, is also found in the Government Sanskrit College Library, Calcutta. It is written in black ink and bears the number Vyākaraṇa 716. It has 5 lines per page. It has 10 folios and is incomplete. It contains the Prākrit renderings of Sanskrit words found in the V?tti and Sanskrit renderings of Prākrit words found in the examples of the sütras. There are some marginal notes and explanatory statements (i. o., ţikā), and these have also been included in the text. These two tīkās of S and S, do not tally with each other in respect of explaining the sūtras, i.e., these two Mss. do not explain the same sūtras in the margin. The beginning of this Ms. is
_ नमो गणेशाय । समृद्ध्यादेरादिरदाद् वा ॥ and it extends upto the výtti
संस्कृतानुसारात् सुपा सह युष्मदस्मof the sūtra no. III. 58.
(ii) Printed material. $ 10, L=This indicates the textual portions of Kramadīśvara's Prākrit grammar as given by Christian Lassen in his Institutiones

Page #18

Linguae Pracriticae, Bonnae Ad Rhenum, 1837. Lassen has not given a complete text of Kramadisvara's Prakrit grammar, but some important portions of the text (with the exclusion of Maharaṣṭrī dialect) have been dealt with. The text as given by Lassen is as follows:
A. Text of Magadhi-p. 393.
B.
Paisaci-pp. 440-41.
C.
D.
19
19

"
29
INTRODUCTION
"
91
Apabbramsa-pp. 449-53. Sauraseni-pp. 50-51 (Appendix).
Lassen's stress was mainly on the fifth chapter of Kramadiśvara's Prakrit grammar, i. e., the chapter which deals with the Apabhramsa, SauraMagadhi, Paisacī and other sub-dialects. Lassen has also discussed analytically the main peculiarities of these dialects which are based on Vararuci1 and Kramadisvara. In pp. 30-49 of the Appendix (Excursus V Ad Librum II) he has given, in a nutshell, some abstracts of the first and second chapters (i. e., vowels and consonants) of the text of Kramadīs vara's Prakrit grammar with constant reference to the sutras of Vararuci. In instituting this comparison Lassen has quoted only a few important extracts (sometimes only one or two words) from the manuscript consulted and collated by him, in order to show the variations from Vararuci. In several other places," a few eutras or lines from the manuscript have also been quoted, and I have consulted them in their respective places.
9
1
§ 11. Lassen himself notes that the Prakrit portion of Kramadīs vara's grammar has been taken from a manuscript in Paris. He also informs us that the name of the commentary (vṛtti) of this manuscript is Pra ṛta-dipika by Candide vasarma. The beginning of the manuscript of Prakṛta-dipikā by Candidevasarma, as quoted by Lessen, is as follows:
8
प्रणम्य गुरुमानन्दं सान्द्रकारुण्यवारिधिम् । श्रीकृष्णाख्यं परमातमनं
तदीयप्रीतिहेतवे ॥
1) The text of Vararuci has also been partly edited by him. 2) Vide pp.. 18, 354, 356, 357, 367, 369 and p. 52
(Appendix). 8) P. 16. 4) Dolci
parātmānam.

Page #19

-10
ORITICAL APPARATUS
शोभाकर-कुलोद्भूत-श्रीचण्डीदेव-शर्मणा ।
क्रियतेऽष्टमपादस्य टीका प्राकृत-दीपिका ॥ तत्र “सर्वभाषासु लक्षणं संक्षिप्तसारमाचष्ट"1 इत्यनेन प्रथम प्रतिज्ञातम्। संपूर्णसर्वभाषासु संस्कृत-प्राकृतादिरूपासु यल्लक्षणं तदेव स्पष्टं वक्तव्यमिति तत्रेदानी संपूर्ण-संस्कृत-भाषा-लक्षणं समाप्य लक्षणान्तरम् आरभे समृद्धीत्यादि। (समृद्धथादेरादिरकारो आद् वा भवति लोकानुसारात् प्राकृते 4 )।
ननु सर्वैरेषा प्रयोक्तब्या भाषा वृद्धानुसारतो ग्रन्थशेषेणैव संस्कृतभाषालक्षणस्य शिष्टप्रयोगस्य विधानमवशेष उक्तस्तत् किमर्थ लक्षणान्तराणीत्यत आह लोकानुसारात् प्राकृत इति । संस्कृते समृद्धिशब्दस्य केवलस्य क्वचिदप्यादिभूतस्याकारस्य आविधानं नास्तीति । अतः पारिशेष्यात् प्राकृत एवायं विधिद्रष्टव्यः । एतदपि लोकानुसारान् नाटकादौ महाकवि-प्रयोग-दर्शनात् प्राकृतं महाराष्ट्रदेशीयं प्रकृष्टभाषणम् । तथा च दण्डी-महाराष्ट्राश्रयां भाषां प्रकृष्टं प्राकृतं विदुरिति, तथा आभीरादि गिरः काव्येष्वपभ्रंश इति स्थितिरिति ।।
$ 12. It is important to note here that just after a century, Luigia Nitti-Dolci has also consulted the same manuscript preserved in the Bibliothe que Nationale, Paris, (Skt. Coll. No. 578), the beginning of which is also the same as given by Lassen, with the slight variation noted above. Dolci° has also informed us that the eighth pāda of Kramadīśvara's Samkşiptasāra was made known to Europe by Father Pons, a Jasuit missionary, who rent a copy of the same to the Royal Library in 1783. Dolei is of the opinion that, so far as it is known to her, this is the only manuscript in Europe in Bengali character, of the 8th pada of the Samksiplasära, which was probably copied in the 17th century A.D. It is this Bengali manuscript of Paris which h utilised by Lassen in his Institutiones. According to her this very manuscript of the Prākyta-dāpikā by Candidevaśarmā was copied by Jacquet for Lassen. The copy was done so carefully that it could easily replace the original. The manuscript bears no date. It has 36 folios and has the same colophon as that of A,C&C1.
$ 13. D=This stands for the text of Prakrta-dhātvādesa of Kramadīśvara as edited by Nicolas Delius and given in his Radices
1) This line is found in the commentary of Goyicandra under mangalā. carana verse. 2) Dolci tādirūpāsu. 3) Doloi gives ārabhate. 4) Found in the foot-note of Lp. 16. 5) Les Gram m. Pkt. pp. 129 & 132.

Page #20

11
Pracriticae, Bonnae Ad Rhenum, 1839. He too had edited this text from the same Bengali manuscript from Paris, consulted and collated by Lassen. That is why Delius's treatise is regarded as a supplement to Lassen's work. We are, therefore, fortunate enough to consult the Dhatvadesa portion of Candideva's commentary with the help of Delius's Radices.
INTRODUCTION
§ 14. P This means the text of the eighth pāda (i.e., Prakṛtapada) only, in Devanagari character, published by Banerjee and Mukherjee & Co., No. 62, Amherst Street, Calcutta, 1886, and printed by Pitambara Vandyopadhyaya at the Anglo-Sanskrit Press No. 2 Nababdi Ostagar's Lane (Sanskrit Press Depository). On the cover page it is written :
महाराजाधिराज - जुमरनन्दि-परिशोधितायां रसवत्यां वृत्तौ श्रोनीलमाधवन्यायालङ्कार - श्रीक्षेत्रनाथकाव्यतीर्थेन सम्पादितः ॥
This is the only text that has been printed so far in Devanagari character. It is needless to say that this printed edition (P) can hardly be called a critical edition, as the editor has not given us sufficient indications of the manuscripts utilised by him. As a sequel to this, no variant readings have been given by the editor. The readings as given there are not always correct, nor are they warranted by the available manuscripts. It has been printed carelessly, and not even proper care has been given in the matter of spelling the Prakrit words. The reading of the text does not always correspond to that of the vṛtti (commentary) thereon.
§ 15. P1This is the text edited by Benīmādhava Chakrabarty in Bengali script, with the vṛtti of Jumaranandī and the commentary of Goyicandra, and published by the author himself, Calcutta,
3762#¶[34478
1899 A.D. (1307 B. S.).
§ 16. P-This text is edited by Syamacarana Kaviratna with the vṛtti and commentary of Jumaranandi and Goyicandra respectively and published by Gurudasa Chattopadhyaya, Calcutta, 1910 A.D. (=1318 B.S.). The script of the text is Bengali.

§ 17. P. This is the text lately edited by Gurunatha Vidyanidhi, with the vṛtti of Jumaranandi and the commentary of Goyican
1) Vide pp. 10-12. 2) Vide p. 10 (fn. 1)

Page #21

12
CRITICAL APPARATUS
dra, and published from the Cbātrapustakālaya, Caloutta, 1924 A.D. (=1332 B. S.). The editor has used the Bengali script for the text.
$ 18. All these tbree editions (P1, P, & Ps) are complete (i. e. including Sanskrit portion) and are in Bengali character. It has been found that all of them are badly and uncritically edited and one has. blindly followed the other. So far as the Prākrit portions are con. cerned, it is evident that all these three (P1, P, & Ps) have copied from P which is earlier, because the errors that we find in P have also crept into these editions without any improvement whatsoever.. So with regard to the Prākrit text, the editions P1, P, and P, are ad verbatim of P. I have, therefore, consulted only the text P, although occasionally others have also been consulted in a very few cases, where any difference was noticed.
§ 19. These four printed editions (P, P1, P, & Ps) are eclectic and based on no recognizable principles. In reality, these are neither trustworthy nor adequate as good Präkrit grammar, Since the editors of these printed editions have not given us any information whatsoever, about the Mes, consulted and collated by them, the value of these printed editions, as it can be judged, is less than that of a single good manuscript. (iii) Textual readings of all the Manuscripts and
those of L and D identical § 20. Now, from the descriptions of L, D and Sabove, we are in a position to say that we have been able to consult partly the Prāhrla-dīpikā of Candīdevaśarmā, although we cannot definitely assert this until the manuscript of Candidova as consulted and collated by Leggen, Delius and Dolci has personally been examined by us in its entirety. It is found that Lassen and Dolci have only quoted the beginnings from this manuscript in which the name Candideva along with his tākā Prakrta-dāpikā occurs. We have also noticed that Lassen and Dalius have presented ug many portions of the text, such as, Māgadbi, Paiści, Apabbramsa, Dbātvādeśa and others, from this manuscript. This gives us some opportunity to consult, compare and contrast the texts of Lassen and Delius with those of the manuscripts, A, B, C, C1, V, S and S, consulted and collated by me. On closer analysis and exami. dation, it is observed that the portions edited by Lassen and Delius

Page #22

INTRODUOTION
13
are perfectly in common with the manuscripts A, B, C, 02, V, S, and S, exceptiag a few readings of Land D, which can easily be regarded as variants. It is curious to note again that the sūtras and the commentary thereon, are exactly the same as the edited portions of Lassen and Dalius. In order to show this similarity the following instances may be cited : Ohapters Text of L and D
Manuscripts A BOC, and
VSS and P No, sūtras
Ch. I Sū. 8
la vani-vadarayor nityam !! loņam, voram !! (LP. 40 APP.)
Sū. 8. lavana-vadara yor
nityam !! loņam, voram !!
,
»
, 14 ādīdūtasca samyukte !!
kajjam, karanijjam, gujjo 11 (LP. 40 APP.). In L (P. 40 APP.) the first chapter ends with Svara-kāryaņ nivs. ttam,
14. alīdūtasca samyukte !!
kajjam, karaṇijjam, sujjo 11 So also in A BOO, SS. and P.
II ,
,
2 kvacid gatvam vā !! gaanam, gay ņam vă !!
(LP. 41 APP.)
2. kvacid yatyam vā !!
gaaņam, gayaņam vā !!
„ „
3 kvacid: vatvam vā !!
subao, sūhavo va !!
3. kvacid vatvam vā !!
suhao, sūbavo vā !!
IV „ 46
jampādir jalpādeh !! jalpäder dbātoh sthāne jampadir bhavati// jumpai 11
After this D gives & long list of rootsubstitutes. (DeliusDhātrādeśa p. 10)
. 46. jalpáder jampādih !!
jalpader dhātoh sthāne jampădir bhavati// jampas !!
After this A BO C, V and S (also P) give a long list of rootsubstitutes. The number
is a bit lesser than in D. 86. Māgadhyām şasoh sah !!
» V , 86 Māgadhyām sasoh śaḥ !! .. , , 87 ro lah !! o , .. 88 yapacavargayuktā manāg.
uocāryāh 11 (Lassen p.393)
,, 87. ro lah !!
„88. şata-varga-yuktā
manāguccāryāh !! A=yaţa cavarga eto.

Page #23

14
ORITIOAL APPARATUS
Such instances need not be multiplied. In this way, if the whole text is reproduced, identical readings (excepting a few variants) will be noticed. Furthermore, Lassen and Delius have sometimes presented us better types of readings which have been incorporatedin the text, where the manuscripts are not clear. It will also be seen (vide emendation $ 26) that the readings of Lassen and Delius have helped us much in determining the correct readings of the text in some doubtful and obscure cases. Below are given the references to those portions of Candideva's Prākrtadāpikā which have been given by both L and D.
No. of sūtras Chapters
No. of aced, to the
Text of L&D Remarks
sūtras printed edn.
and Msg. I. Svarakāryam.
43
PP. 16-17. For Only & few abthe introduc- stracts from the tory verses of Ms of Candideva Candideva. are given, but PP. (4 0-4 1) these are the same (APP.) of Las- as in the Mas and gen.
P. II. (Hal-kāryam) 153
155
PP. 41-48 The excess in L chapter-mark
(APP. of is due to split-up not given by
Lassen). of one būtra of ABOC, SS, P and
the Mes and P LD.
into two.
43
III. (Subantakāryam).
83
IV. (Tinantakāryam).
Sū. 22-25 Sū. 29-30
Sū. 46-83 (Dhatvādeśa)
No text of this portion has been given by L. P. 354 of L The entire dhätPP. 356-57 L vādesa is given PP. 10-12 Prā. by Delius. krta m gåtbā. dau etc.) of Delius,
V. Apabhramśā- rambhah.
117
For nipāta. cf. PP. 369-70
of Lassen. A pabbramsa : PP. 449-83 (L The last sutra Sū. 1-70
(No. 117) is not S'auraseni : PP.50 51(APP) given by Lassen. Sū. 71-85 of L. PP, 893 Magadhi : of L. Sū. 86-99 Paisacī : PP. 440-41 of Sū. 102-16. L.
V. (contd.) Oolo
iti vādindra iti vādindra Same as in phon: (after
etc. (vide etc. vide the ABCO, SP. metres & rheto
critical appa- description ric portions).
ratus M88. of Lassen A BOC,). before. (cf, p.
15 of Lassen). There can thus be no doubt from the examples quoted above that the textual readings of all the manuscripts and those of L and Dare identical,

Page #24

INTRODUCTION
15
(iv) Candidevaśarmā’s Prākṣta-dīpikā not identical with
the vrtti of Jumaranandi $ 21. But it should be noted here at the same time that although there are similarities in textual readings between them, yet two important points can easily be discerned in this connection : first, the introductory verses of Lassen are not found in all these manuscripts excepting S; secondly, the colophon of all of them does not bear the name of Candidevaśarmā. From these one may conjecture that the present ortti of the Prākrlapāda (ascribed to Jumaradandī) and the commentary of CandidevaŚarmā are not identical, but they are confused with each other. Two possible explanations for this confusion may be suggested. First, it may be said that Candideva wrote his commentary on the ortti of Jumaranandi, with an introduction at the beginning. He was, perhaps, at the beginning a bit elaborate, as the introduction of Lassen and S shows, and then epitomised his discussions and wrote the vitti in a condensed form. Initially, he had also given some explanations of some sūtras, but later on perhaps, he discarded that idea, and left it to Jumaranandi: That is why it is found that the commentary of Candideva is incomplete and fragmentary. What it seems to me is this that Candidova, perhaps, did not write his commentary on all the sūtras of Kramadīśvarā's Prakrit grammar (at least we do not find it in this form so far) ; or he had begun to write the commentary, but could not complete it. This incomplete and fragmentary aspect of Caņdīdeva's commentary, as it can be judged from Lassen and S, makes this confusion between the Vrtti of Jumaranandi and the commentary of Candideva. Practically speaking these two commentaries are not identical. Secondly, it can also be surmised that when there was no commentary on the Priikrlapādá (as we do not know of any other commentary earlier than this–Gogīcandra's commentary not being available now), Candideva wrote this commentary independently, which had been styled, in course of time, after the Rasavatī of Jumaranandi. And as his commentary was written only on the Prakttapāda (after which we have portions on metres and rhetorics), we do not find any colophon of Candideva immediately after the Prākrit portion. But the colophon in which the word “Rasavatī'' cocurs, is found at the end of metres and rhetorio portion. That is why in all the manuscripts

Page #25

16
CRITICAL APPARATUS
(AB0C18) as well as in the printed editions including Lassen's we find in the colophon the imputation of "rasavatyām vritau", to the Prākrtapāda also," and this inclusion of the word rasavati creates & confusion between these two commentaries. Incidentally it may also be mentioned here that the exegetical notes (=tākā) found in the margin of sand S, were written so sporadically and unsystematically that they could not be the fragments of the commentary of Candideva, because in that case they would have been identioal. It may also be pointed out here that sometimes some explanations are found in A and these are also totally absent in these two manuscripts (i.e., in S and Sı). As all these tīkās found in the margins of A, S and S, do not explain the same sūtras, they must have been written by different persons or copyists who had utilised them for their purposes. It is therefore, quite possible that these tīkās should vary from manusoript to manuscript. However, considering that these tīkās, though sporadio and fragmentary in nature, may be helpful for the understanding of some of the sūtras of Kramadiśyara's Prākrit grammar, these have been printed here in a different type under the caption tākā in the main body of the text.
II. Evalution of the manuscripts
(i) Congruity in MSS. $ 22. It will be evident from the above description of the manuscripts used for the edition of Kramadīśvara's Prākrit grammar that all these manuscripts do not show anything like recensions, nor do they fall into any group ; on the contrary, they show a close kinship and identical recension, and belong to one and the same group or family. From a careful perusal of all these manuscripts, it is not unlikely for one to surmise that one has, perhaps, copied from the other, although we are not in a position to find out the original copyist. Those manuscripts do not even vary from the printed editions, the subsequent editors of which have followed the earlier one. These manuscripts have so many common obaracteristics that the style of writing of the copyist is almost the same, excepting the forms
1) It is interesting to note that the commentary on the 8th pada is always found separately. If it is found with the Sanskrit grammar, it has still no connection whatsoever with the original manuscript ; it entirely differs in leaves and in the style of writing and it is generally copied by a different man and, perhaps, in a different place and time (vide my manuscript 0,).

Page #26

INTRODUOTION
17
.
of letters, which are bound to vary from copyist to copyist. In forms, contents and chapter-markings, all these are skin to each other, excepting the number of folios which vary from manusoript to manuscript. They are all written in a Bengali character of not very old type. Only after the first chapter, do we find the chapter-marking as "Svara-kāryam nivȚttam" in A BOO, SS, and even in L and before the beginning of the fifth as "Apabhramśārambhah". All the colophons are exactly the same, excepting in B where an additional inclusion of "mahārājādhiraja-Śrīmaj-Jumara-parisodhita-víttau" is found. All these manuscripts contain the metre and rhetoric portions also. The marginal glosses of Prākrit renderings are found, excepting in B where the evolution of Sanskrit sounds is given, The Sūtras and the vitti's are identical and exactly the same, save a few migreadings and omissions.
$ 23. Generally speaking, the readings of all these manuscripts of Kramadīśvara's Prākrit grammar, consulted and collated by me, ere almost invariably the same, and the variants in readings which we notice in all these manuscripts are not such as to prove the existence of two or more recensions of the work. In all the Mss. the same carelessness of individual copyists, sometimes with the intention of improving upon the text of the author, is also noticed.
$24Some orthographical peculiarities which are common to all these Bengali manuscripts may be noted below :
(1) Vowels
:) Sometimes it is very difficult for us to ascertain initial or medial a (T) or a (7) which is normally confounded with e (4) or rarely with tā ().
ii) Confusions in short ė () with h (3), long 7 ( 5 ) with dda (W), o ( l ) with tta ( 6 ) or sometimes with tu ( 9 ),u () with da (5),( 4 ) with tra ( 0 )-are noticed.
jii) : (visarga) is retained when it should be dropped in Prākrit words; and it is, at times, dropped in Sanskrit words where it is to be retained.
iv) (anusvāra) is given with a dot (.) above the word, and sometimes as usual (2),

Page #27

18
ORITIOAL APPARATUS
(2) Consonants : Simple v) In consonant, the following sounds, initial or medial--are generally confounded :
ka ( ) and pha ( F ); kha (30) and tha (t);2 ( t ) and bha ( 5 ); ca ( 5 ) and va or ba ( 7 ): tha ($) and oa ( 5 ), da ( 5 ) and (€); ņa (9) and la ( 77 ) and also with na (at); da (7) and pa (9); ra (7) and ba or va ( 7 ); ya ( 7 ) and ja ( 8 ).
vi) Besides, the following consonants with vowels, other than a(9), are also confounded :
dha (1) and ? (*); bhi with hu (7) or gu (*): pu.(%) and mu (I) with su (2).
vii) The three sibilants are freely confused.
(3) Conjuncts
viii) It is to be noted that conjuncts like jra (9) and jja (*); dru (F) and hra (?); ştra () and stra ( ); stha ( ) and hu () are not easy to distinguish.
ia) As all the manuscripts are written in Bengali script, we find the following system of doubling :
rija ($), rddha (F), ryya ( 5 ), rova (), rmma (*) eto.
a) Two aspirate sounds are generally retained, where the previous one should be de-aspirated. It is curious again to note that the mistakes of these manuscripts are almost exactly the same, save in a few cases which are, however, generally helpful to as in improving the reading of the text.
(ii) Differences in the MSS.
§ 25. Although there are points of similarity, still they differ in some respects. The beginnings of all of them are not always similar and so also the colophons. Besides, in C and O, the dates of copying the manuscripts are given, while the rest are silent on this point. There are also some differences in readings, and these are helpful to us in ascertaining the correct readings of the text by eliminating many misreadings and scribal errors.

Page #28

INTRODUO TION
(iii) Emendations
§ 26. To edit a text like Kramadisyara's Prākrit grammar, some sort of emendations are necessary, where the readings of the text are exclusively incorrect and meaningless 88 can be inferred from the texts of other grammarians, earlier or later. If this is not done, I am afraid, the text will be full of misrepresentation of the characteristics of Prākrit language, because, an the readings of all these manuscripts as well as of the printed editions generally follow each other in forms and contents, and even in the case of omissions, mistakes, carelessness and slipshod penmanship eto., it is necassary to suggest some convenient emendations of the text in some rare cases (which are put in [ ] square brackets), not with the pretension of improving upon the author, but to arrive at the genuine readings of Kramadīśvara's Prākrit grammar which have suffered a good deal at he hands of the soribe through generation after generation of manusoript copying. Although the emended readings have been incorporated in the text, their variants have been recorded in the footnotes. It may be that with this procedure this edition may not claim to be critical in the true sense of the term, but it is hoped that this may be an authentio edition within the compass of the material available at our disposal, This does not mean that I have levelled down the linguistic peculiarities of the text, but the text itself is presented in a standardised form following the linguistic characteristics of Kramadīśvara as evidenced from the text. For example, under the sūtra-"sayyāderet" (1.4) the word "vandi" is given as one of the words belonging to this class of "akrtigana" in all the manuscripts as well as in the printed editions. Lassen's quotion contains "valli", although the ligature is "vandă" and this lends support to my emended reading as [vallā), because, in all the texts of the eastern grammarians, under the same "akytigana"; the word "valla" is found and not "vanda". In this way, iD ABOC,SS,L and P, the reading of the sūtra lobhārthe bāşpe (II. 71) is hazy and difficult to understand. It is found that Lassen bas tried to correct it as alobharthe eto., in order to arrive at the genuine reading of the text. But still the meaning of this sūtra is unintellingible. It can, therefore, be presumed, on the strength of other grammarians, that the sutra might have been composed in the

Page #29

20
CRITICAL APPARATUS
form of lo [vārdre] bāşpe (han] which, in course of time, has undergone a radical change. Considering this, the portions enclosed in the bracket have been emended as such. In the same way the examples, such as, aśva, puşya, svašrū and miśra found in the ortti of the sūtradurlabhādar yuktasya (II. 111), have been corrected by me in place of adhvan, puspa, satru and mitra respectively, because it is found from a perusal of other texts that words belonging to this olass-- where the preceeding vowel is optionally lengthened when one member of the conjunct is dropped-are aśva, puşya, svašrū and miśra and not adhvan puşpa, satru and mitra which become in Prākrit as addha, puppha, satta and mitta respectively. Similarly, in ABCO, VS and P the readings of the two sūtras, such as (1) gāhulyādir gāthader. alpädar" (sū. V. 14 printed editions)--gāthuli vahvati !! and (2) khede" (V. 15 ibid)--hiadā phuttadai uttabbha !! --are not clear. It has been thought that "gahuli vahvati khede hiadā phutta dair tubbha" may be the reading of the text (only by joining the sūtra "khede" with the original example). Luckily Lassen's readings have come to our rescue. He has given it as follows :
gāhunyādir yathāder alpādau !! 14 !! gāhuņī vaddhati khede hiadā phutta dair tubbha !! 14 !!
(p. 450 of the Apabhramsa chapter). Lesson has also pointed out its correction as "vaddhadai" khede hiadāphuta etc., in the footnote. Here also we notice the identical readings of the text. In the same manner the reading of the sūtraşața-vargayuktā manāguccāryāḥ (V. 88) of all the printed texts is unintelligible and obscure. The manuscripts consulted by me contain the readings as
"yața-cavargayuktā manāguccāryāḥ" (01), "yața cavargayuktā manāguccāryāḥ" (C),
"yața-cavargayuktā manāguccāryān" (A). The reading of Lassen is
"yapacavargayuktā manāguccāryāl". Whatever may be the readings, it is pretty certain, that all these readings are not clear on this point. The insertions of p (in the reading of Lassen) and ţ (in the others) leave us in doubtful obscurity. Another reading beginning with ş is undoubtedly a scribal error for y as corroborated by the readings of the other manuscripts. Here

Page #30

INTRODUOTION
21
also the reading of Lassen has helped us much to omend the reading of the text which will be yapa[ra] cavargayutkā manāguccāryāḥ, in which case 'po has been dropped by the scribe through oversight. If this emended or conjectural reading is correct, then the meaning of this sūtra will be quite clear and it will go at par with the readings of the later eastern Prākrit grammarians like, Puruşottama (cuh spaşta-tālavyaḥ. XII. 13), Rāmaśarmā (cavargakāņām upari prayojyo yukteşu cântaḥsthayakāra. II. 2.18) and Mārkandeya (cajayor upari yah syāt. XII. 21). It is quite possible that at the time of Kramadīśvara the palatal sounds were pronounced with v prefixed to it. This was still prevalent at the time of Rāmaśarmā end Märkandeya
$ 27. In fine, it may be added that in judging the readings of the text of Kramadīśvara's Prākrit grammar a mechanial adherence to the forms of the sūtras is as deceptive as blind allegiance to the text of any partioular manuscript, howsoever excellent or useful it might be. "It needs mention in this connection that the true method of finding out a sense depends entirely upon the proper consultation and collation of the manusoripts, sometimes by joining one or two words, if necessary, or sometimes by separating or by emendations, where the sense urgently so requires. Because, it is a matter of great surprise but nevertheless perfectly true that in ancient times the manuscripts did undergo change of colour with odds beyond arithmetio, due to the corruption and confusion of the Mas., or due to the ignorance of the scribes, or due to some additions that are made with the intention of improving upon the author. As a sequel to this, the interchanges of ca ( T ) and va (a), sa (#) and ma (H), ka (*) and pha (), tha (%) and ya ( 9 ) eto., were so much so that we are quite at a loss to decide now-4-days which was correct and should
1) The problem- the Manuscripts vs the Grammarians--has been discussed by Th. Bloch, Vararuci und Hemacandra, p. 48, by R. Pischel, Grammatik der Prākrit Sprachen ($ 44); by Walter Eugene Olark, Māgadhi and Ardhamagadhi, JAOS, 44, 1924, pp. 118-121 ( 19). In addition to their arguments, I may ada here that neither the grammariang nor the manuscripts alone should be given proper importance, but the manuscripts should be judged in the light of the spirit of the author.

Page #31

22
OBITIOAL APPARATUS
be taken. The collators of manuscripts best know how the original readings of ancient classics do undergo change of complexion, sometimes beyond recognition, at the hands of grammarians, rhetoricians, prosodists, and lexicographers ; how blots and blemishes steal into the manuscripts through the negligence or ignorance of the scribes ; how the intrusive hand of the poetasters, deluded by a chimerical and insolent hope of improving upon the author, inflicts a wound here and there, mora serious than the more negligence or ignorance of the copyists ; how archaisms gradually give way to modern manners of expression at the hands of scholiagts long habituated to and well co versant with familiar forms and phraseologies of the modern classio87." Such is also the case with Kramadisvara's Prākrit grammar for which some sort of emendations have been suggested in order to arrive at the genuine reading of the text.
III. Constitution and presentation of the text $ 28. Of the seven manuscripts (A BOO, V 8 and 8,) on which this edition is based, is the only oldest dated manuscript which hears the date Saka 16(0)8 (+18=1686 A.D.). Then comes the manuscript 0, which is also dated as Saka 1771 (+78=1849 A. D.). Only these two are the dated manuscripts, while the rest (A, B, V S and Sı) are silent on this point. We can conjecture the date of L which, as Nitti-Dolci says, was copied probably in the 17th century, because of the fact that it was made known to Europe by Father Pons who sent a copy of it to the Royal Library in 1783 A.D. If her assumption is true, then it can be said that it was the oldest of the manuscripts consulted by me. But as the text of this manuscript has been partly given by Lassen, I have no other alternative than to depend upon O mainly. Again, there is a similarity between C and A, as well As between L and V; the manuscripts B and Care almost modern written within the range of hundred years. For convenience, O and A may be classed together, while L and V (though fragmentary) form the other class ; and B and C, may be kept seperately. S and S, form one group, but akin to B and C1. The printed editions are based on some other manuscripts which are akin to ABOO, 88,. They must, therefore, be classed according to the following diagram.
1) Quoted from my paper, vide PTALOO, 18th session, 1958, pp. 275-76.

Page #32

INTRODUCTION
Bome unknown Manuscripts.
(Archetype)
(oldest type)
(later than x, but akin to it)
(quite modern)
T
S and Si
Printed editions.
For my edition, presented here, I have primarily followed the manuscripts C and A, though I have also consulted L and V (those portions available). The manuscripts B and C are consulted only when CAL V are not clear. Sand 8ı have been consulted mainly for the tīkās. The printed editions have been consulted only to check the omissions of the text. Each and every material has been scrutinised and judged from this angle of vision in order to make the text a useful one.
$29. So far as the presentation of the Prākrit renderings of some Sanskrit words, olasged as "akrtigana" is concerned, I have generally followed the manuscripts ACC, 891 (although P has been consulted) and have included them just after the end of the vrtti within the the third bracket [ ]. These Prākrit renderings are found in the marginal notes of ACC. 981 and in the footnotes of P. In this randering, some incorrect Prākrit forms or scribal errors are noticeable ;

Page #33

24
ORITIOAL APPARATUS
and these have been corrected following the rules of Kramadīśvara's Prākrit grammar. In these renderings the case-terminations of Präkrit words are not given, because the Sanskrit words in the akytigana are devoid of case-terminations, although the Mgs. bear such terminations. Only the base forms are given.
$30. In presenting this text certain principles have been adopted with regard to the treatment of ya-śruti, labial b and semivowel v, and dental n and corbral . In these three aspects the eastern Prākrit grammarians®, such as, Vararuci, Kramadīśvara, Purusottama, Rāmaśarmā, Mārkandeya eto. differ widely from the western grammarians, like Hemacandra, Trivikrama and others. According to the dictum of the eastern grammarians a (9) is always to be written in case of ya-śruti. Because, in their opinion the rules regarding the substitution of ya for a refer to pronunciation and not to writing. So there will be no harm, if we write a () instead of ya after any vowel, e.g., a, ā, i, 7, 4, ū, 8 and o, when they are the remnants of the udurtta vowel; and the reader will pronounce it acoording to his practice. It is for this reason that we do not find any ya-śruti, at least, in writing, in the manuscripts of the eastern grammarians. Similarly, according to the principles of the eastern authors, the dental no is altogether omitted-be it initial, medial or conjunct. Bharata and Vararuci ( n. 7-11, 42) advocate cerebral n overywhere, 80 also Kramadīśvara, Rāmaśarmā and Märkandeya. But the latter three writers (probably by the influence of the western authors) also know its option. It is found that Prākrit grammarians of the eastern School are almost unanimous with regard to the change of dental n into cerebral n in the Mahārāstrī. The treatment of labial b and semi vowel v is somewhat different. For practical purposes v is written, although it is to be pronounced like labial b. The two sūtras of Hemajandra-po bah
11 The detailed study of these three aspects along with others will be found in my paper, entitled, "Some linguistic traits peculiar to the Eastern School of Prakrit Grammarians' submitted to the Professor Sukumar Sen Felicitation volume to be published shortly from Calcutta. Here I need not go into the details about these three aspects. 2) On the two schools of Prākrit grammarians, vide my article 'A note on the two schools of Prakrit grammarians, Jaina Bhārati, January 1964, pp. 32-41.

Page #34

INTRODUCTION
25
(I. 231) and bo vaḥ (I. 237) are not found in any of the easteru texts. As the manuscripts of the eastern grammarians are either in Bengali or in Oriya character (and rarely in Devanāgari), it is very difficult to understand what they actually mean when they compose the sūtra in the form of cott, because in Bengali and in Oriya the same character b corresponds to the Nāgarī 7 and af. When we come to Kramadiśvara, . we find no such distinction between & labial b and & semi-vowel v maintained from the point of view of the construction of the sūtras.' He simply states 697 7: (II. 5); but what The means to say is neither clear from the manuscript nor from the other rules of the text. The above-mentioned two sūtras of Hemacandra, (viz. po vaḥ and bo vaḥ ) are not also found in Kramadīśvara. So also is the case with the other grammarians like Puruşottama, Rāmaśarmā and Mārkaņdeya. Mārkandeya's text is written in Oriya character and hence we are to come across the same diffioulty. Considering all these aspects of the problem, I have adopted the method of Cowell, wbo in his introduction to Vararuci's Präkyla-prakāśa says--"I have also throughout followed the manuscripts in writing (a) as the Prākrit equivalent for the Sanskrit p ; in the continental editions of the plays it has been usual to write b, but for this tbere is no authority, as the manuscripts make no difference between the v=the Skt. P, and that=the Skt. v. The rules of Vararuci evidently show that there was no distinction whatever between 6 and v". He further adds-"It is not so easy to determine which of the two sounds thus absorbed the other and whether in translation we should represent it by b or v universally; the analogy of the modern languages would incline us to the former, but a sūtra in Hamacandra ... seems to favour the latter, which I bave, therefore, adopted throughtout". Ho has, therefore. printed semivowel v and has rejected b altogether in his edition of Präkttaprakāśa. Similarly, I have also printed semi-vowel v in the sūtra po vaḥ (II. 5) of Kramadīśvara and left it to the reader to pronounce it according to his speech habit.
$31, In fine, it may be added that a modest and conscientious effort has been made to present the text faithfully, carefully and cautiously as far as possible after judiciously eschewing the scribal errors. I have not

Page #35

26
KRAMADISVARA
silently tampered with any of the genuine readings of the text in order to fulfil any dialectal convention or some linguistio expectation. I have always carefully noted the actual readings of the text and their variants in the footnotes where any alternative correction or emendation is suggested; not a single manusoript reading is consciously sacrificed in the interest of some editorial discipline.
3. KRAMADISVARA 1. His Life and Personal History?
(i)
An Anecdote about the Composition of his Grammar
$ 32. The name Kramadīśvara,' often credited with a grandiose appellation "Vadīndracakracūdāmani" i.e., 'orest jewel of the circle of great controversialists or disputants', is a well-known grammarian and logician. His grammar entitled "Samkşiptasäravyākarana", had the widest circulation in the western part of West Bengal, and Montgomery Martin relates that even at Dinajpur in the 17th and 18th centuries the students spent many years in studying the Samkşiptasāra of Kramadīśvara. But unfortunately the life and
1) My information is chiefly based on the following: 0. Lassen, Institutiones etc. Bonnae Ad Rhenum, 1837 ; N. Delius, Radices Pracriticae, Bonnae Ad Rhenum, 1839 , Th. Zachariae, Krámadiśvara's Samkriptasāra in Bezzenberger's Beiträge, V, 1880, pp. 22-63, R. Pischel, Gramm. Pkt. Spr. & 37 : (also in his De Grammaticis Pracriticis, p. 19ff); Gurunātha Vidyānidhi, Samksiptasāra Vyakarana, Calcutta, 1924, H. P. Sāstrī, A Des. Cat. Skt. Mss., Vol. VI. pp.lx ff , L. NittiDolci, Les Gramm. Pkt. pp. 129–146 ; Nalinināth Dasgupta, Kramadiśvara and his School of Grammar, IO. (V), 1938-39, pp. 357 - 61. 2) The derivation of his name offers some difficulty. According to the strict grammatical rules, it should be "Krāmadīśvara" with a lengthening of the initial vowel, as it is a combination of the present participle form of the Vkram, "to step" "to walk", with īśvara. Gogicandra, under mangalācarana verse, has tried to defend this in the following manner : thetrat afè 44: ATE# seat 57€: ( sūtra no. 215 ) for fara Haatfa ofensat lataafa acha, fe abf676-ciggaag nafa-4797-fa17-7fc4e4aqt oqartt: Barfa sa: 11 3) History of Eastern India Vol. II, 1838, p. 713.

Page #36

INTRODUOTION
personal history of this grammarian Kramadīśvara are shrouded in obscurity; and as time rolls op it has succeeded in keeping some traditions, most of them, no doubt of an apocryphal origin. These traditions, overlaid with clouds of myth and legend, (for which it is very difficult to believe and accept them) lead us to admit one thing regarding the origin of Kramadīśvara's grammar and his school, for which some scholars believe that Kramadīśvara, Jumaranandi and Goyīcandra were almost contemporaries with an interval of less than hundred years between them. However, the anecdote about the composition of his grammar may be given below.
$ 33. Kramadīśvara became an orphan even from his very childbood; and so there was none to look after him. Once upon a time, when he sat down near a stream with his cowherd comates who were playing there, a teacher, while travelling, had come there and asked the boys about the direction of his destination. Some of the boys pointed to him the direction where he found a stream which he would have to cross in order to reach his goal. As there was no conveyance to take him across, he asked the boys about the depth of the river where he would find shallow water, if he wanted to ford it. The cowherds could not give any reply to it, but the child Kramadiśvara, without the least. hesitation, gave & fitting reply, "Sir, you can go safely on foot by this way where the current of the stream is too strong" (and therefore sballow). The teacher did accordingly. After crossing the stream he: thought that even at that tender age the child know the intricacy of this phenomenon. Surely, he must be an intelligent boy. The teacher could not check himself and so he returned to that. bank. He asked the boy two more questions in order to test bis intelligence. Upon enquiry, he came to know that the name of the boy was Kramadīśvara, a Brahmin by caste. Knowing fully well that the boy would be a great davant (Pandita) in future, he took him home and began to teach him Grammar, Philosophy, Logio, Literature and allied subjects. In due course he had become an adept in grammar; and therefore, he wished that he would compose & Sanskrit Grammar. Without informing anybody, even his teacher, he began to write a Sanskrit grammar very
1) Op. Gurunātha Vidyānidhi, Ibid, Preface, p, 3 f.

Page #37

28
KRAMADIŚVARA
Tuoidly. One of his class-mates tacitly understood the intention of Kramdīśvara and out of sheer malice to bis genius he became an impediment to the progress of his work and tried to kill him in order to put a stop to it. One day, all on a sudden, he ran amuck and made an assault upon Kramadiśvara, while he had been composing his grammar. For some time & tussle went on, when, at last, Kramadīśvara began to run away with his manuscript to his preceptor's house where he throw it away into his room. His friend attacked him from the back and beat him with a stiok on his head, and Kramadišvara died instantaneously. Finding him dead his friend was quite at a loss to decide which course to adopt : and at last, he fled away leaving the dead body buried under the seat of his preceptor, where he used to impart lessons to his students. In course of time the news spread far and wide ; and ultimately that assassin was caught and the teacher drove him away from his school. After a few days the teacher found some portions of Kramadīśvara's grammar in his room. Then he presented that manuscript to the then king Jumaranandī who revised the grammar and also tried to restore the lost portions by the pandits of his assembly.
§ 34. There is another version of this story which relates & somewhat different situation for the circulation of his grammar. It is stated tbat Kramadīśvara composed his grammar very carefully ; but it had no circulation being a new one. He tried his best to teach his students, but none would give any importance to it. So, out of anger, he threw it into a pond. Others say that his grammar was so full of errors and logical fallacies that after some time he himself could not understand some portions of it. He, therefore, throw it into the pond of Jumaranandi, the then king of his time.
$ 35. However, one day while Jumaranandi was walking in the evening along the bank of the pond, he saw it and brought it through his servant. The king was well-versed in different branches of the Sāstras and he, therefore, understood the value of this work ; but unfortunately some portions of Krdanta, Uņādi and Taddhita-pādas were lost. In order to recover the lost portions he wanted to find out the real author of that manuscript. On enquiry he found out Kramadīśvara whom the king requested to recover the lost portions.

Page #38

INTRODUCTION
But Kramadisvara did not do it; and the king, therefore, replaced the lost portions by the pandits of his assembly.
29
36. In this way, the king recovered and corrected some portions of his grammar and circulated it in his kingdom by composing a vṛtti on it. Seeing such a deep and sincere interest of the king in the work, Goyicandra wrote lucidly, under the aegis of the king, an elaborate exegetical commentary on both of them. In this way the grammar had become famous and been circulated during his life time.
37. From the first story narrated above, it may be presumed that Kramadis vara did not live long enough to complete his grammar.. He had originally composed the sutras (but not completed them),. while Jumaranandi, one of his contemporaries, had revised his sutras. and also composed a vrtti, called "Rasavati", along with the lost. portions, in order to complete it. Goyicandra has elaborately written a commentary (tikā) on both of them. It is also understood from the story that Samksiptasara school had passed three stages of development to become a complete regular school. So, like Panini,. his grammar can also be called a "triad".
(ii) Parentage and Native place
§ 38. Unlike other later Sanskrit writers, who are often confident self-puffers, Kramadiś vara leaves but a scanty record with regard to himself and his date. So we know very litte of his parentage and native place.1 But only from the end of the eighth pada of his grammar we come to know that he was devoted to learning as a hermit, a supreme logician, a very learned Brahmin, a poet and an inhabitant of Purva-grāma; he was the son of one Cakrapāņi and the grand-son of one Śrīpati; and he was a successful man.
$ 89. Now, to identify Kramadisvara with the physician Cakrapāņi (datta) of Lodhravali family, the commentator of the Caraka-samhitā

1) It is not true to say that 'nothing is known of Kramadiśvara's parentage. and nativity' vide S. K. Belvalkar, Systems of Sanskrit Grammar, Poona, 1915, p. 108..
2) faaraq)suf aratez: qågint fen: sfa: 1
x11fagdt sa1913ą aarat siqà: Kat 11 P. 524 of Samkṣiptasära vyakarana ed. by Gurunatha Vidyanidhi, Calcutta, 1924.

Page #39

-30
KRAMADISVARA
and contemporary of Nayapāla, is idle and futile? ; as the former was a Vaidya, while Kramadīśvara came from a Brabmin stock. Similarly we are not in a position to identify Kramadīśvara's grand-father with Śrīpati$ who supplemented the Kātantra Vyākarana of Sarvavarmā.
$ 40. As regards his native place we are confronted with some difficulties. Because, as the word "pūrvagrāma" generally means "& village in the east", the people of East Bengal think that he was a native of East Bengal, while others are of the opinion that since his grammar has & wide circulation in West Bengal, he must belong to that region,
(iii) Discussion on Pūrvagrāma $ 41. Pūrvagrāma is an old name of a particular village or locality; and to it belonged the 'pūrvagrāma-kulakalānidhi' Nārāyaņa Vidyāvinoda, son of Vāņośvara and grandson of Jaţādhara, who wrote & commentary on the Amarakoşa. From the same pūrvagrāma hailed the Saiva pontif Visvešvara Saivācārya.* who was highly eulogised as a very learned scholar in the Malkapuram stone pillar Inscription (1261-62 A. D.) and in whose connection we come to know definitely that Pūrvagrāma was in the province of Dakşiņa Rādha of the Gauda country. The village Pūrvagrāma is also celebrated in the Malkapuram stone pillar Insoription by the
1) Jāti-tattva-vāridhi (in Bengali), by Umesh Chandra Gupta, Calcutta, 1902 p. 237. 2) There is another Srīpati of the same name who wrote & small treatise called Prsodarādiurtti which was written in the Saka era 1297 (-1375 A. D.), vide Belvalkar, Ibid, p. 111. But no reference is found about his connection with Kramadīśvara. 3) A manuscript of which is found in the Government Oriental Library, Madras, vide, Triennial Catalogue, Part I, Sanskrit C, 1928, pp. 5894-95. R. No. 3645. cp. Eggeling's Catalogue of Sanskrit Manuscripts in the Library of the India Office, Part II, p.221, No. 830, 4) Epigraphist's Report, Government of Madras, Home Department (Education) G. 0. 1035, p. 122. 5) Mention of Purvagrāma is found in the Malkapuram Stone Pillar Inscription which stands in front of the ruined temple of Visveśara, at Malkapuram, Guntintakur in the Guntin district, Madras, vide Epigraphist's Reports etc., pp. 122, 124, Malkapuram Stone Pillar Inscription of Rudradeva, JAHRS (IV), 1930, pp. 147-62; R. O. Majumdar, History of Bengal, Vol-I (Hindu period), Dacca, 1943, pp. 683, 685 (n). 6) EFT FTAFI धर्मनतयः श्रीगौड-राढोल्लसत्-पूर्वग्राम-शिखामणि-गणपतिमापाल-दोक्षागुरुः क्षिराध्वेरिव चन्द्रमाः 31f74a mateient quga: sfagagart - PETTATH-stan-47749-JAHRS(IV), p. 158.

Page #40

1
INTRODUCTION
Kakatiyā queen Rudradevi, and is described to have been situated in the Radha division of Gauda, as also in Dakşina Radha of Gauda. So from this epigraphical evidence it is clear that Purvagrāma was a village in Dakşina Radha of the Gaudḍa country which can be taken as the present Burdwan division excluding north and west Birbhum, Purulia and Bankura. Kramadiśvara must, therefore, belong to that region, and in that Dakşina Radha of the Gauda (West Bengal) country where his grammar was once widely circulated and nicely taught.1
31
(iv) His religion
$42. With regard to his religion some say that Kramadiśvara was a Saiva as he began his grammar with a salutation to this deity (i. e. Śiva). But it should be remembered that the science of grammar started with Siva and hence it is also expected that he should start his work with a salutation to Siva: but that does not necessarily mean that he was a Śivaite.
8
(v), His work
(a) About the name of his grammar
43. The only work of Kramadiśvara that we know is his grammar which is known as "Samkṣiptasara" i. e., a short treatise

1) N. N. Dasgupta has aptly said, "The wide circulation of a certain work in a particular region may, therefore, it is important to note, sometimes constitute a ground to surmise, in the absence of first hand proof, that its author belonged to that region'. IO (V), p. 358. 2) शिवं प्रणम्य सर्वेषां सर्वभाषासु लक्षणम् । संक्षिप्तसारमाचष्टे पण्डितः क्रमदीश्वरः ।। 3) It should be noted that even the oldest commentator Goyicandra in the context of the mangalacarana verse explains the word "Siva" used by him at the beginning of his grammar as 'auspicious'. Thus he says "kalyānāśamsi sūtrakāraḥ kuśalapadasadṛśartham sivapadam ādāv upanyastavān". Some may surmise that since he hails from Purvagrāma, which was an abode of Śaivism at that time and to which Visvesvara Śaivācārya belonged, he may be an advocate of Saiva religion, but he has not mentioned Śiva at the beginning of his work because of that. It should be noted at the same time that whatever religion he may have professed-be he a follower of Saivism or some other faith-it is pretty certain that he was above the sectarian prejudices.

Page #41

32
KRAMADĪSVARA
in which all the rules of grammar are succintly described. Some? scholars are of the opinion that it is an epitome or an abridgement of some larger grammar; and as it is seen that this is a hand-book in which the nioeties of Pāņiai's grammar have been dispensed with for the comprehension of the beginners, it could be the abridgement of no other grammar than Pāņini's. But it should be borne in mind at the same time that although it is called "Samkşiptasāra", its bulk is second in magnitude to that of Pāņini's Aştādhyāyī.* Rāmacandra's Prakriyākaumudi and Bhattoji's Sidhanta-kaumudi cannot be classed with it, as their grammars are based on Pāņini's Aştādhyāyā, recast and re-arranged. Kramadīśvara adopts altogether a different method of collocation and arrangement for his grammar and he does not even follow the arrangement of Făņini. The commentator Goyioandra has also given a different explanation for the title of Kramadīśvara's grammar. He says that the title may signify a treatise in which all
f essential grammatical elements have been collected for the proper understanding of the beginners. So the question of an abridgement from other grammars does not arise. While criticising Belvalkar who calls 'the title' 'a misnomer', H. P. Šāstrī* opines that the grammar has rightly been called "Samkşiptasāra", because Kramdīśvara, has utilised the materials of the entire grammatical literature even of the different schools, previous to him. In that Case he only reiterates the statement of Goyicandra.
(b) Special features of his grammar § 44. Kramadīśvara, like Pāṇini, has followed a system of his own; he divides his grammar into eight chapters (pādas”), the last chapter being on Prākrit grammar and on metres and rhetorics. The first seven pādas are devoted to Sanskrit grammar
1) S. K. Belvalkar : Sys. Skt. Gram., p. 108 f. 2) Pāṇini has 3983 sūtrag, while Kramadīśvara has 3857. It is to be noted that if we exclude the sutras relating to Vedic (say about 1000) the number would have been more. We cannot, therefore, say that it is an abridgement of Pāṇini. 3) feasy aa a fal spear afga: संगृहीतः सारो यत्र तत् संक्षिप्तसारम् । अन्यत्र प्रकीर्ण मसारं विद्यते । तदध्ययने मन्द धियां केवलATH7 41, O TEET afara---țākā of Goyīcandra under mangalācaranz
4) Des. Cat. Skt. Mss. (VI), p. lxxiv. 5) Does he refer to the Vaidic ‘aştā padīvāk' (eightfold speech) ?

Page #42

INTRODUCTION
on its different aspects, such as, Samdhi, Tinanta, Krdanta, Taddhita, Kāraka, Subanta and Samāsa. That he has not followed the arrangement of Panini is clear from the fact that Samdhi comes first in his system, while according to that of Panini it comes at the end. Moreover, he has rejected some of the apparently unnecessary and difficult sutras of Panini as well as the Vedic rules. H. P. Śāstrī1 is of the opinion that Kramadisvara had followed the Vakyapadiya of Bhartṛhari (651 A, D.). But there is no justification for this surmise.
§ 45. One of the striking features of his grammar is this that the commentators of this school take illustrative examples from the Bhattikavya and in this respect it has a resemblance to Bhartṛhari's Dipika on Patanjali's Mahābhāṣya. It is interesting to note, again, that (Nara-)-nārāyaṇa Vidyavinodācārya of Purvygrāma wrote a commentary called Bhaṭṭibodhini, on the Bhaṭṭikavya, and he explains all grammatical peculiarities of the poem by citing the authority of of Kramadisvara's grammar.
§ 46. Another special feature which is interesting for our present study is the inclusion of Prakrit in continuation of his Sanskrit grammar; and in this section (which is divided into five chapters, namely, vowele, consonants, declensions, conjugations and Apabhramsa including Magadhī, Saurasenī, Paiśācī and several other sub-dialects), he has recorded some of the special traits, other than those which are common to all, of Prakrit language, particularly of Apabhramsa.
(c) On the genuineness of his Prakrit grammar
§ 47. But scholars are not always unanimous with regard to the genuineness of this portion. Doubts have been raised on the authenticity of the eighth chapter dealing with Prakrit, which, according to Belvalkar, is a later addition. But by citing the authority of Goyīcandra" we may say that the eighth-pada (i. e. the Prakrit
2
33
1) Des. Cat. Skt. Mss. p. lxi. The similarity in the method of arrangement, though farfetched it is, does not mean that Kramadiśvara has followed it truly i but the resemblanc may be regarded as accidental. 2) Keith: History of Sanskrit Literature, p. 429. 3) R. L. Mitra's Notices of Skt. Mss. Vol-IV, pp. 209-10, No. 1637, Calcutta, 1878. 4) Sys. Skt. Gram. p. 109. 5) (a ) सर्वेशं शिवं प्रणम्य सर्व भाषासु संस्कृत - प्राकृतपैशाच्यादितु संक्षिप्तसारं लक्षणं क्रमदीश्वरनामा पण्डित 'आचष्टे taifa zat: (b) संस्कृतभाषालक्षणानि समाप्याष्टमेन पादेन प्राकृतादिभाषालक्षणानि विरचितवान् - Goyicandra under Mangalācarana verse

Page #43

34
KRAMADISVARA
portion) is a genuine one. Goyicandra clearly says in his commentary that after finishing Sanskrit grammar, Kramadīśvara had composed the grammar for Prākrit languages in the eighth chapter. Besides, we have seen that Kramadīśvara bas followed the same scheme and technique as he used in the first seven pādas of his Sanskrit grammar. Nitti-Dolci also voiced the same opinion when she tried to prove its genuineness. So, nothing can be said against the validity of the eighth pāda of his grammar.
(a) Why has he inoluded the Prākrit portion in his Sanskrit Grammar ?
$ 48. But a question may be raised why & treatment of Prākrit be appended to his Sanskrit grammar ? The answer is simple : he has treated the language as a whole which not only includes Sanskrit ('purified') but also Prākrit ('natural'). In the Sanskrit dramas, Sanskrit and Prākrit languages have been simultaneously used. To a learner of Sanskrit who would read Sanskrit literature (specially the dramas), a knowledge of Prākrit is necessary. So, for proficiency in Sanskrit the study of Prākrit can in no way be ignored. Kramadīśvara, therefore, thought it necessary to include Prākrit in his Sanskrit grammar.
§ 49 Pischel® is of the opinion that Kramadīśvara inoluded it, because Hemacandra did the same thing in his grammar. Unless Kramadīśvara's date is determined, we cannot find the veracity of Pischel's remark. E. P. Šāstrī wants to say that Kramadīśvara had included it in the interest of the Saivas of Bengal, because the Saivas at this period used the Prākrits and vernaculars in their propaganda work. The Bengal Saivas of Candradvīpa wrote in the vernacular, traces of which are to be found in later Buddhist works ; and the Kāśmira Saiva works are almost invariably accompained with some verses in the vernacular at the end of each chapter.• Kramadīs. vara, therefore, found it necessary to give some grammar of the
1) Les Gramm, Pkt. pp. 131-32.2) Gramm, Pkt. Spr. $ 87. 3) Upadhye, A. N. Prakrit Language and Kashmir Saivism in Dr. S. K. Belvalkar Felicitation Volume, Patna, pp. 192-95.

Page #44

INTRODUOTION
35
Prakrits and the vernaculars. us, is far-fetched.
E. P. Šāstri's argument, it seems to
(vi) Jumaranandi and Goyicandra_the two earliest
commentators of his grammar
$ 50. Kramadīśvara's name is intimately connected with Jumaradandi and Goyīcandra, the two earliest commentators of his grammar, of whom we know nothing except their names. From the commentary of Goyicandra we come to know that Jumaranandi was an independent king, as he had an imperial title, "Mahārājādhiräja". | Umesh Chandra Vidyaratna' has given an account of Jamaranandi without referring to any authority. We cannot, therefore, identify Jumaranandi with all those facts mentioned by Vidyāratna.
§ 61. Gogicandra has clearly stated that Jumaranandi wrote his commentary (ortti), entitled Rasavatio on the complete text of Kramadīśvara. The Rasavati-vrtti of Jumara had become so famous at that time that the name of this school was designated as "Rāsavata", and he himself was called "Ragavaj-Jumara". Since Jumara had ravised and corrected Kramadīśvara's grammar, it is designated as "Jumara school".
1) Des. Cat. Skt. M88. (VI), p. lxii. 2) It is found in the colophon of the commentary of Goyicandra. 3) Vide his Jatitattu a-varadhi, 2nd edition, Calcutta, 1911, pp. 203-05. For information, I am giving this account in brief: It is said that Jumaranandi was the son of Jagadānandanandi in the line of Bhřgunandi (a head clerk of Vallālasena of Bengal) and was born in the year 775 B. S. (= 1368 A. D.). He belonged to Kāśyapagotra and was an inhabitant of Radha. His name was variously spelt like Jumanesvara, Jambura and then Jumara. He had two sons : Lavanośvara and Maheśvara, of whom the former had three sons : It is also stated that Jumaranandi had to leave Rāąha and had to settle down at Murshidabad and from there his bons shifted to reside in different places in connection with their services. 4) In one manuscript this Rasavati-vrtti is wrongly Ascribed to Kramadīśvara, vide, Catalogue Sommaire des manuscripts Sanskrits et Palis, de la Bibliothegue Nationale, by A. Cabaton, 1907-08, Paris. p. 95.5) Op. R. G. Bhandarkar's Report on the search for Sanskrit manuscripts in the Bombay Presidency for 1888-84, p. 68.

Page #45

36
KRAMADISVARA
$ 52. But it should be borne in mind that the vrtti of Jumaranandi is not exegetical, it is merely illustrative. He only gives examples of each and every sutra, but does not explain them. In so doing, he sometimes quotes and criticises some irregular grammatical anomalies found in the writings of the famous poets of Sanskrit literature. The authors, cited from the Kavya literature, are Kalidasa, Bharavi, Magha, Dandi, Baṇa, Bhavabhuti and Murari. Some works, such as, Janakiharana, Bhaṭṭikavya, Sapta-kumarika, Pañcatantra have also been cited by him. Of the lexicographical works Amarakosa, Trikāṇḍa and Utpalamāla are mentioned. Grammarians like Jayaditya-Vamana, Raksita, Bhagavṛtti, Bhaṭṭavārtika have duly been mentioned by him in acknowledging their views in their respective places. It is curious to note again that he cites from one "Dhātu pārāyaṇa", a treatise on the classification and conjugation of Sanskrit roots. Rajendralal Mitra1 also notices one Dhatu pārāyaṇa attributed to Jumaranandi. H. P. Sārtri also mentions one Dhatumala by Jumaranandī in the beginning of which the name of the author occurs:
॥ ॐ नमः शिवाय ॥
धातौ शम्भु मुखोद्भ ते भ्रान्त-वैकल्यमागते । क्रियते तस्य शुद्धयर्थं यत्नो जुमरनन्दिना ॥
मादादौ जुहोत्यादी etc. etc....... This work, it is said, is intended to serve as an appendix to Kramadiśvara's grammar. Has he then cited from his own work? Besides this, we know nothing about Jumaranandi and his work.
§ 53. Next in the line comes Goyicandra who has written an elaborate commentary on all the chapters of Kramadiśvara's grammar as well as on Jumaranandi's vṛtti. The name of his commentary (ṭīkā) is called "Samkṣiptasāra-vivarana". From his commentary we come to know that he has written his commentary on the Prakrit portion also; but now it is not available. It is also added that for the proper comprehension of the aphorisms of Kramadisvara, he has listed 127

1) Notices of Skt. Mss. (IV), p. 212, No. 1640. The colophon is-"iti śrīmajjumaranandikṛtau dhātupārāyaṇaḥ samaptaḥ". 2) Notices of Skt. Mss. (second series), Vol-1, Calcutta, 1900, p. 198. No. 196.

Page #46

INTRODUOTION
37
paribhāşās of ancient grammarians. It is also to be noted that he has also written two more commentaries on the Prakirnavrtti and Unādisutras. Taddhita-parisişta and Krdunādiśaşavrtti are also attributed to him.
§ 54. GoyĪoandre has been credited with an epithet "autthasanika" meaning thereby, 'one to whom the king stands up and offers seat when he comes to the court'. This is the explanation given by Keśavatarkapañoādana, one of his commentators. Belvalkar surmises that this may be a 'patronymic or some religious or political title the significance of which is lost to us." But H. P. Šāstrī informs us that 'this custom still prevails in Rājputānā but it bas lost its Sanskrit name at present. A noble man, who is honoured by the king in this way, is called a "Tazimi omrah". 8
$ 55. From Goyīcandra's commentary we come to know that Umāpatidatta whom the king loved very much adorned the court of Jamaranandi; and perhaps it was at his request that Goyīcandra undertook to write a running commentary on the sūtras of Kramadīs. vara and the vrtti's of Jumaranandī when these bad become corrupt and mutilated owing to copyists' fault. II The other commentaries of his grammar
(i) On the Sanskrit portion
$ 56. Goyīcandra is the last original commentator of this school. Others, who came after him, have commented more or less either on the Vivaranatīkā of Goyīcandra or on different sections of Kramadīśvara's grammar. Of the comentaries the Sārārthadāpikā of Vamớivadana, the Vyākāra sāra-laharī of Kavicandra, Vyākāradīpikā of Nārāyana
1) 37919 ettersi alza tranfcfufifa i refer4 TET ( v. 1. TTFT?) arfaza, # (v. l. TFF) for 79 ri f _Košavatarkapañchāna 10C (II), London, 1889, p. 222 (fo). 2) Sys. Skt. Gramm. p. 110. 8) Des. Cat. Skt. Mss. (VI), p. lxiv. 4) ai o pai 2118-vitarf.forta-fansमतिरधिकृतोमापतिदत्त प्रभृति-समाजन-सभाजनपर-उखामुक्त-दुरुक्त-विचार-चारु-चतुरो जुमरनन्दिafutf-Fu after I We have several poets of the name of Umapati, Umāpatidhara, Umāpatidatta (for which vide Aufrecht's Catalogus Catalogorum), bat none of them has definitely been identified. We are, therefore, not in a position to say anything regarding him.

Page #47

38
KRAMADISVARA
Nyāyapancānana, Durghatodghata of Keśavadatta Tarkapañoānana Bhatýācārya, Kaumudī of Abhiramavidyālaskāra, Arthabodhanī of Candrasekhara Vidyalankāra and Harirama Vāoaspati, tīkū of Sarvavidyālankāra Bhattācārya, Bhāvarthadīpókā of Mahesa Pañoānana are worth-mentioning. The Sārasangraha of Pitāmbaraśarmă is an abstract from the Samkşiptaşāra. This school is also rich in its treatises on roots. Besides the Dhātupārāyana or Dhātumāla of Jumaranandī, we have several other important works, such as, the Dhātumālā of Mahesa, Rūpaprakāśa of Kullūkabhatta, Dhāturatrāvala of Rādhākļşņa-Śarmā, Dasavala-kārikā of one Daśavala (?), and the Vasudhatukärikā of an unknown author. On ganas, the Ganaprakāśa of Nārāyaṇa Nyāya pañcānana and the Ganamārtanda of Nộsimba Tarkapañoānana are remarkable. The Třapakāvali of Haragovinda Vācaspati can also be mentioned in this connection,
(ii) On the Prākrit portion $ 57. None of the authors has written any commentary on the Prākrit portion of Kramdīśvara's Samkşiptasāra. It is said that Jumaranandī wrote a vrtti on the Prākrit pāda also ; it is also said that Goyicandra too wrote an elaborate exegetical note on the 8th pāda of Kramadīśvara. But unfortunately Goyīcandra's commentary on the Prākrta-pāda is not available now-a-days, and regarding Jumaranandi's vrtti nothing can be said at present, until the manuscript of Candidevaśarmā has been carefully examined.
$ 58 The only commentator of Kramadīśvara's Prākrtapada, so far as it is known to us, is Candidevaśarmā described above. We know one Candidāsa who is the commentator of Kavyaprakāśa. He is also described as the younger brother of the grand-father (or accord ing to some the great grand-father) of Viśvānātha, the author of Sahitya. darpana (14th cent. A. D.). It is also said (10C. No. 839) that Nrsimha Tarkapañoānana is the descendant of Candidāsa who belonged to the endogamous groups called Vanga-meli. They lived at Ketugrāma four miles away to the Uddharaṇapura on the Ganges. But nowhere do we find any reference to his authorship of a commentary on Krama
1) My information is chiefly based on Mitra's Notices of Skt. M88, (IV) and . P. Sastri's Notices of Skt. Mes, and series, Vol-II , Des, Cat. Skt. Mss. (VI), Proface, pp. lxiv-lxxiii , TOO. Vol-I, part II and Vol-II.

Page #48

INTRODUOTION
dīśvara's Samkşiptasāra. So in the absenc of any conclusive evidence we cannot identify this Candidāsa with Candidevaśarmā of Prūkstadīpikā. Moreover, in the introductory verses the author Candidevašarmā describes himself as one who was born in the family of “Sobhākara" (sobhākarakulodbhava). Bat we do not know whether Caņdīdāsa, the commentator of Kavyaprakāśa, also belonged to that family. So these two Caņdīdāsas cannot be identified. It seems to us that Candidevasaramā of Prākertadāpikā is later than Candidāsa, the commentator of Kavyaprakāśa.
III The date of Kramadīśvara $ 59. As regards the date or antiquity of Kramadīśvara nothing oan be said definitely at present, as the materials at our disposal are scanty and meagre ; so bis date has remained undetermined as yet. Scholars are not even unanimous in this respect; they have attempted to place him either between Hem&candra (1088-1172 A. D.) and Vopadova (1250 A. D.)1 or after Vopadova. Zacharia has remarked that we can neither prove that Kramadiśvara flourished after Hemcandra, nor could we say that he had written his grammar before Hemacandra. Nitti-Doloi* has almost voiced the same opinion when she says that the date of Kramadīśvara between Hemcandra and Vopadeva can only be provisionally acceptable. In determining the age or antiquity of Kramadīśvara, let us discuss the problem anew.
$ 60. It is important to note, at least, for the antiquity of Kramadīśvara that he mentions in his sūtras such predecessors as Katantra (1st cent. A. D.), Dāndra (470-600 A. D.), Bhāgartti, Kșapaņaka and Vamana. It is again worth noting that the latesti of the authors oited by him is Vámana. Now, we have two Vāmadas -one is the author of an Alankāraśāstra, called Kavyalankārasūtra,
1) Belvalkar, S, K. Ibid, A. B. Keith places him in the 13th cent. A. D, Hist. Skt. Lit. p. 432.2) Colebrooke intends to place him after Vopadeva, op. Mis, Es. II. 3) BB. V. p. 26. 4) Los Gramm. Pkt. p. 130.5) 1994 afa
1967 (Sandhi 196, see also 106), 38tatfira fa 2175(Sandhi 342) and qyte4l fa altres (Samāsa 212); fragt afa Alfa: (Käraka 101) ; op. also 436 ; fagia face fa 79974: (Samāsa 407) s ECCT 04 Tafa farcela fer TH9: (Samāsa 168).

Page #49

40
KRAMADISVARA
who, it is guegged, must have lived in 800 A. D.: and the other is one of the writers of the Kašikā which was composed about 660 A. D.*. It is to be noted here that it will not be unwise to suppose that Kramadiśvara might have mentioned the grammarian Vāmana and not the rhetorician Vamana. But in any case the upper limit of Kramadīśvara's grammar may be tentatively assigned to the end of the 9th century and the beginning of the 10th century A. D., if we do not place him in the 7th-8th centuries A. D. Furthermore, Goyidandra has also informed us that when the Bhāşya of Pāṇini differs from its ortti, Kramadīśvare gives the option to both the forms, or sometimes rejects the vrtti which is nothing but the commentary of Jayāditya and Vamana who came a little later than the Bhartphari in the 7th century A. D. That settles again the upper limit of Kramadīśvara.
§ 61. The date of Kramadīśvara is intimately connected with that of Jumaranandi and Goyīcandra. As regards Jumaranandī's date it can be said that he cannot be later than the first quarter of the 15th century A.D., since Rāyamukuţa, in his commentary on the Amarakoşa, calls him "Rasavaj-jumara".S Rāyamukuta wrote his commentary at Gauda in 1431 A. D. It may be pointed out, on the other hand, that Sarvānanda, one of the oldest commentators on Amarakoşa, (dated 1159 A. D. 1) mentions one "ahātu pārāyana" in his commentary. If it is identical with Jumara's treatise of the same name, then can it not be surmised that he or his work was well-known in the 12th century A. D.? These two dates may be regarded as the upper and lower limits respectively of Jumara in the absence of any conclusive evidence. It is to be noted that the authors and the works cited by him, are not later than the 11th century A.D. Moreover the title "Mahārājādhirāja" is significant. It gives to some extent some hints of the approximate time of Jumaranandi. It is known that the last Sämantādhipati of the lower Bengal region was Dāmodarapă la (1190 A.D.). So the epithet Mahārājādhiräja might be earlier than
1) S. N. Dasgupta and S. K. De, Hist. Skt. Lit. p.886. 2) P. V. Kane, Intro, to Sahityadarpana, p.139. 3) Vide, Th. Aufrecht, Zur Handschriften Kunde (Kommentare sum Amaar-kosha) in ZDMG (28), 1874, p. 113 where he has given a list of authorities quoted and consulted by Rāyamukuta.

Page #50

INTRODUCTION
41
that period. It is not impossible, therefore, that Jumara who might have descended from a high official of the Pala's who acquired a semi-independent status after the house called himself a 'Mahārāja' in the 11th or 12th century A.D.. Sandhyākaranandi's (11th century A.D.) father, Prajāpatinandi was a minister, & pleni-potentiary as well 88 & provincial governor (Pratirāja) under king Rāmapāla. Jumara might have, therefore, lived in the 11th or 12th century A.D.
$ 62. We are still in the dark as regards the date of Goyicandra ; but from one of his commentators, namely, Vaņšīvadana, son of . Vašiştha and Rāyamatī, we may say that Goyicandra might have lived before 1300 A.D. The date of Vamśivadana, as can be deduced from a manuscript which bears the date of its composition, is Saka 1243 (=1321 A.D.), If that is correct, then it can be said that Vamsivadana is to be placed before 1300 A.D., and GoyĪoandra earlier still.
$ 63. There is a tradition that Jumaranandi and Goyīcandra, were contemporaries. Although there is no genuine proof on this point, excepting one single manuscripta in which it is stated that that Goyicandra's tīkā was corrected by Jumaranandi, still it can be said that if Vamśīvadana's date can be taken before 1300 A.D., then we may probably place Jumaranandī at least in the 12th century A.D., if not earlier. From the above it is guessed that Jumaranandi might have lived in the 11th or 12th century A.D., Goyīcandra, therefore, may be a little later to that time. Kramadīśvara's date, therefore, may be placed earlier i.e. between the tenth and the eleventh centuries A.D.
1). In Notices of Sanskrit Manuscripts (2nd series), Vol-III, Calcutta, 1907, No. 319, pp. 208-09, by H. P, Sastri, we find the date in the following verse :
1950. spal-de-f47-fafat HTË STATE
पक्ष चापि तु कृष्णके शुभ-तिथौ वारे तथा भूभिजे ॥ 2) IOC, p. 218, No. 816. The reading of the manuscript is defective. N. N. Dasgupta has corrected the reading of the manuscript and says as follows: *'If we correct the "krtāyām' and 'parisodhitāyām' of this corrupt colophon as 'krtā' and 'parisodhita', it would give rise to the presumption that Gogicandra Was but a contemporary of Jumaranandi, who corrected his tikā". 10. (V) p. 360.

Page #51

KRAMADISVARA
.
4. Kramadīśvara's Prākṣtādhyāya : a Critical Study
I On the arrangement of the sutras
§ 64. Now, we shall say something about his Prākrit grammar. It is found from a perusal of Kramadīśvara's Prākrit grammar that he not only knew the sūtras of Vararuoi, but also reproduced in a great measure the same on the main Prākrit (i.e. Mahārāstrī). It is also found that Kramadīśvara followed an edition which is nearer to Bhāmaha's ; but, on the contrary, it may be said that in certain cases he adopted the readings of Vasantarāja, Sadānanda and others. Although he has followed Vararuci in the arrangement of the sūtras, yot certain remarkable innovations are discernible. He has added & certain number of new sūtras and ignored many of those which are found in the Präkrta-prakāśa. The phenomenon of ya-śruti is partially known to Kramadīśvara. while it is unknown to Vararuci. Similarly
the chapter on Apabhraņģa is exclusively Kramadīśvara's innovation · and these are interesting and helpful to the students of Prakrit Philology.
$ 65. Kramadīśvara's Prakrit grammar is divided into five chapters ; e.g. svara-kāryam (i), halkāryam (ii). subanta-kāryam (iii). tiñanta-kāryam (iv) and Apabhramsārambhah (v) including many dialects and sub-dialects, such as, Māgadhi, Paišācī, Vrācada, Sabarī and so on. In the Vrtti of the sūtra "sabara sor etvam" (V. 98) he mentions the name of Sauraseni as one of the sub-dialects of Prākrit. Barring this, he has not clearly mentioned the name of Sauraseni, although from the sūtras, it can be inferred that he has also given some characteristios of the Sauraseni dialect. Lassen bag, therefore, inoluded those sūtras under the category of Sauraseni. In the first chapter Kramadīśvara has described in due order the changes of vowel sounds in Prākrit. His second chapter can be sub-divided into two parts. The first part contains the treatment of single consonants, while the second deals with the conjunct cozonants. In the third ohapter he describes the nominal and pronominal declensions, while in the fourth the treatment of conjugation, verbal substitutes and indeclinables are described. In the fifth he has first discussed the characteristics of Apabhramsa and then motions numerous dialects and sub-dialects of Prākrit. In this arrangement Kramadīśvara has followed some new

Page #52

INTRODUCTION

procedure of his own. He discusses the [Sauraseni], Magadhī, Paiśāci, Sabari Vracaḍa and other dialects after the Apabhramsa. Does he, therefore, consider these dialects as varieties of Apabhramsa ?
§ 66. Kramadisvara has not elaborately discussed the principles. of Prakrit like later writers, but has nicely collected the main characteristics of Prakrit language current at the time. Sometimes he is too brief to be understood (e.g. the sutra, rt-1.27); but that is because of the fact that he has always tried to curtail the number of the sutras by incorporating the "adhikaras" to the sutras. In fact, so far as the treatment of the principal Prakrit is concerned, he has not added anything remarkable, except some forms which are not. found elsewhere. Besides controlling and elucidating the sutras of Vararuci, the value of Kramadiśvara lies in the fact that he has. incorporated numerous dialects of Prakrit which are totally absent in Vararuci. Linguistically Kramadiśvara is importaht, because he represents truly the eastern school of Prakrit grammarians.
II The Prakrit dialects found in his grammar
$67. The Prakrit dialects as described, and mentioned by Kramadisvara are the following: Mahārāṣṭrī, [Saurasenī], Māgadhī (v. 83), Ardhamaāgadhī, Paiśācī (v. 93), Vracaḍa (v. 66), Nagara (v. 67), Sabari (v. 96) and Apabhramsa. He mentions the name of Maharaştri while describing the Ardhamagadhi (Mahārāṣṭrīmiśrardhamāgadhi. v. 95). I have said above (§ 63) that Śauraseni has not been metioned by him. He has given the characteristics of Vracada. (v. 66), Nagara (v. 67) and Sabari (v. 96) in one sutra each. In the Vrtti of the sutra "sabare sor etvam" (v. 96) we find the names of Saka, Abhira, Draviḍa, Oḍra, Avantya, Avanti, Śravanti, Pracyā, Saurasena, Bahliki, Dākṣiņatya and Desi-vocables; and it is also said there that these are used in a drama according to the characters of the play. So far as Vracada is concerned it is described as a variety of Apabhramsa (Vracaḍādir-Apabhramsabhedaḥ) and this Vracada Apabhramsa is used in the gathās. Similarly, it is said that Nagara is different from Vracaḍa, which is also used in the gathās. Upanagara, a variety of Nagara, is also mentioned in the Vrtti of the sutra "seşe nagare vā skādau" (V. 67). The names of these 21 or 22 dialects and sub-dialects of Prakrit are found in the Prakrit grammar
43

Page #53

44
of Kramadisvara.
While giving examples of those Prakrit languages, the commentator has quoted some lines from some verses which are not, however, traceable.
III Analytical contents of the Apabhramsa chapter of his Prakrit grammar
(i) Apabhramsa
§ 68. Kramadiśvara has given the following characteristics of Apabbramsa.
I. Non-initial voiceless single consonants become voiced (V. 1): e.g. vaka>vaga; sukhita>sughida.
II.
(V. 15) and conjuncts with rare optionally retained (V. 2, 5); sukrta>sukra, sukaa ; puttra>putta, vyāsa brasa, bhāṣya> bhrāsa.
III The following pronominal substitutes are found :-etat>sha (in all genders) (V. 8); idam>imu (in neuter) (V. 10); yādṛk>jehī, jehe, jehu (V. 9); tādṛk>tehi; kīdṛk>kehi; îdrk>shi ; kim>kiṁpa (V.13).
IV. Adverbial substitutes: katham>kemu (V.11); yathā>jima, jema, jidha, jadha: tatha>tima (V. 12), tema, tidha, tadha; yatra> jethu (V. 5. comm.); tatra>tetthu; kutra>ketthu ; atra>etthu ; yavat jama; tavattama; tataḥ>to.
V. jjevva and jani are substituted for iva (V. 6).
VI. nada, naḍā and nāvai are substituted for nunam (V. 7). VII. The following case-terminations of -a, -i and -u bases of the masculine, feminine and neuter nouns are given,
Singular.
Masculine.
Original Apabhramasa
endings.
endings.
KRAMADISVARA
su.
am.

elision (18) :
น (19)
:
• (20)
:
elision (18): u (10)
:
nara gacchai
naru
godo meho.
dhaņu.
Feminine.
mahila pucchai
mahila pucchai.

Neuter.

Page #54

INTRODUOTION
ta.
singular daieņ, aggiem daieņa.
; :
(36): khatýão.
om (21) ena (21) nã (23) of 4-u bases he (27)
:
aggiņā aggim,
nasi.
rukkbabe.
he (33): khattābe
he (34) mahuhe.
ada (27) ho (28)
: :
nas
rukkbādū. rukkbaho, aggiho. rukkbasu. rukkhassa. aggiham.
-do
-do
su (28) : ssa (28) : ham (32) of 2-4 bases :
ni
him (26) :
sa (Voc).
long (14) : short (16) ;
(16) :
Aggihim mabubim. dhollā hiaļā. putti. bale bbagge.
Plural.
Masculine
Feminine.
Neuter.
Original endings.
Apabbramsa
endings. [ho] ; 2,0 (35) :
jas
aggiho
mabilāho (17) kumārīu. khattau. mabilão.
kas
2,0 (35)
:
mälão peochaba
bhis
bhyas
hum (26) :
rukkhahum padido. tarubam
ham (31) of: 2-4 bases

Page #55

46
KRAMADISVARA
am
ham (29) : hem (30) of: 3-4 bases
rukkhabam vabihem taruhem.
sup
jas (voc.).
ho (17)
:
aggiho
mahilabo.
VIII. The bases of yuşmad ara tuha, tubbha, tujjha and tumha, and those of asmad are hamum, majjha and amha.
Singular Deol, of yuşmad.
and
asmad. Nom. tuha jādo tuham
hamum Acc. taim pucchāmi
aim puccha Inst. tahim
aim Abl. tuha, tuhum
majjha, mahum Gen.
tuha, tuhum tujjha, tubbha
majjha, mahum Loc, taim
aim
Plural. Nom. tumhe pucchaha
amha puochamo Acc. tumhaham pucchāmi
amhaham pucohaho Inst. tumhehim dinnam
amhehim Abl. tumha
amha tumha
amha Loc. tumhāsu
amhāsu IX. The accusative singular forms of yat and tat are jrum and drum rospectively (V. 46).
X. The locative singular forms of yat and tat are jadru and tadru respectively (V. 47).
XI, Abstract-suffixes are formed with dā, tūna and ppana (V. 48). XII. tva> evi, eppi and eppinu (V. 50).
tum>ņam, tum evi, eppi and oppiņu (V. 52) 6.g. broppi, broppiņu (V. 55) ; karappi, krppi (V. 56); gameppi, gamppi (v. 56). tavya > ivvam (V. 49) e. g. kariuvam.
Gen.

Page #56

INTRODUOTION
.
47
XIII. Verbal substitutes :-(V. 57-65)
sthā>ttņā; mrå>mara ; dhrn> dhara ; dyś>passa ; vraj>vaja ; brūñ>bro; bhū>ho; grah>genha ; key>kāsā
(in future). XIV. The passive voice is formed with ija (V. 60); e.g.
sumarijadi ; and also with ijja, as, sumarijjadi. The second and first personal endings of the imperative are as follows :1st person,
2nd person Sg dehum (V. 63)
kari, kars, kuru, karahi
(V. 61). Pl. samkahum (V. 63) dou, samkau (V. 62). XVI. The future is formed with ssi (V. 65); as, sumarissidi.
(ii) Drācada $ 69. Vrācada is a variety of Apabhramśa and in it the retention of r in a conjunct-consonant is permissible. drum and jrum are also ased in this dialect. eppi and eppiņu are used for gerund (tvā) (V. 66).
(iii) Nāgara-Upanāgar $ 70. Nāgare is another variety of Apabbraņś& and s and k are profusely used in this dialect (V. 67). Upanāgara, a sub-variety of Nāgara, is the language of the gathās.
(iv) (Sauraseni] $ 71. The following obaraotoristics of Saurasens are discerniblo. : I. k, d, dh and bh are optionally retained (V. 68) of ; e.g. moai,
modade ; madhukari, surabhi. II. l is found in the preposition prati (V. 74); e.g. pratijñā>
· paliñcā. III. Gerund (tvā) is formed with ia (V. 70); but in gam and k?
it is formed with dua ; (kadun, V. 71 and gadua, V.72). yāvat and tävat become yettika and tettika respectively
(V. 69). V. The nominative and accusative plural ending of neuter is
with or without n (V. 75); e.g. kumdaim, kumdāni. VI. The genitive singular termination of all genders is do
(V. 76); 6.g. purisādo, mahilādo, aggūdo.

Page #57

48
KRAMADISVARA
VII. The substitutes of bha and sthā are bho and cittha reprec
tively (V. 78) and that of as is atthi (V. 79). VIII. The future is formed with ha, sa, 38a (V. 80) and these are also added to the Causative with i or 7 before it (V. 81).
(v) Magadhi § 72. Next are given the characteristios of Māgadhi in the following manner.
I. In Māgad hī, the palatal sounds (ca-varga) are pronounced
with but a slight contaot of the tongue with the roof of the
mouth and an y is prefixed to the sounds of ca-varga. (V. 85). II. i becomes y (V. 87); e.g. varjayitva>vayyayidāni. III. becomes 1 (V. 84); 6.9. roşaḥ>lose, IV. § and s become Ś (V. 83); e.g. sādhuḥ>šāhū ; şațpadah>
sappade. V. hadakka is substituted for hrdaya (V. 86). VI. The genitive plural ends in hum (sometimes with the
lengthening of the final vowel) (V. 91); e.g. brāhmanasya >
bamhanāhum. VII. The vocative ends in a (V. 90): e.g. deva> devā. VIII. hake and hage are substituted for aham (V. 94). IX. The root sthā becomes cittha (V. 92). X. ņia is substituted for the ending ta of the past passive
participle (V. 89). XI. dāņi is substituted for the gerund ending tvā (V. 88).
(vi) Ardhamāgadhi § 73. According to Kramadīśvara, Ardhamāgadhī is nothing but. an admixture of Mahārāștrī (and Māgadhī] (V. 95).
(vii) Śābarī: $ 74. The nominative singular of śābarī ends in e (V. 96) : e.g. eśe mese. The long and short vowels are freely interchanged (V. 98).
(viii) Paiśācī $ 70. The following characteristics of Paiśācī are given by Kramadīśvara.
(vi::
..,

Page #58

INTRODUCTION
49
I. The voiced sounds are changed into the voiceless (V. 100);
e.g. gagana> kakala, gharma>khamma; sometimes voice
is retained (V. 101); e.g. yajana >jajala and also cacala. II. ~ and n> 1 (V. 103); e.g. bhanati>phalati ; dhvanati >
thvalati : vaņa> pala (V. 104). III. r>1 (V. 105); e.g. caraṇa>calala. IV. ņ and n> ñ (optionally V. 106) e.g. kanaka > kaña ka ;
parna>saเที่ส. V. iva, eva>yeva (V. 107); e.g. harir eva> hali yeva. VI. hrdaya>hitaa ka (V. 108). VII. The nominative plurals of the first and second personal
pronouns are ampha and tumpha (a lso tuppha) respectively
(V, 109-110). VIII. pho and phura are substituted for bhū (V. 111), IX. The rest are like the common Prakrit (V. 112). X. In Paisāci the words are to be formed from usages
(V. 113); for example, he has quoted the following verse : जडासो तडासो चारिहत्थो धर [ त ]इ अग्गे खेड्डवुत्तो। गाई होही घरणि विदोही सो किस वोल्ल अणाहि पाहित्ति ॥

Page #59

Page #60

Vr. 1.2. RT. I.1.1. Mk. I. 3..
Hc. I. 44. T. I. 2.10.
संक्षिप्तसारे प्राकृताध्यायः
प्रथमः परिच्छेदः स्वरकार्यम्
ओं नमः शिवाय समृद्ध्यादेरादिरद् आद् वा ॥११॥ ___ समृद्धयादेरादिरकार आद् वा भवति ॥ लोकानुसारात् प्राकृते। समिद्धी सामिद्धी वा समृद्धिः॥ प्रकट अभिजात मनस्विनी प्रतिपत् सहक्ष सदृश प्रसुप्त प्रसिद्धि प्रतिसिद्धि प्रतिस्पर्द्धिन ॥ लिङ्गविशिष्टग्रहणात् स्त्रीपुनपुसकेष्वपि बोद्धव्यम् ॥ [पअड पाअड। अहिआअ आहिआअ । मणंसिणि माणं सिणी। पडिवआ पाडिवआ। सरिच्छ सारिच्छ। सरिस सारिस। पसुत्त पासुत्त । पसिद्धि पासिद्धि। पडिसिद्धि पाडिसिद्धि। पडिप्फद्धि पाडिप्फद्धि।] टीका।
ओं नमः शिवाय प्रणम्य गुरुमानन्दं सान्द्रकारुण्यवारिधिम् । श्रीकृष्णाख्यं परात्मानं तदीयप्रीतिहेतवे ।। शोभाकर-कुलोद्भूत-श्रीचण्डीदेव-शर्मणा।
क्रियतेऽष्टमपादस्य टीका प्राकृत-दीपिका ॥ तत्र “सर्वभाषासु लक्षणं संक्षिप्तसारमाचष्ट" इत्यनेन प्रथम प्रतिज्ञातम् । संपूर्ण-सर्वभाषासु संस्कृत-प्राकृतादिरूपासु' यल्लक्षणं तदेव स्पष्ट वक्तव्यमिति ।
____1) ACP. ओ नमः शिवाय,BSS1. ओं नमो गणेशाय, C1. ओं रामः। 2) C. समृद्धयादेरादिरद् वा। 3) Not found in B. 4) Found in the margin of B. 5) Found only in S. 6) L omits, but it is given by Dolci, vide Les Gramm. Pkt. P. 132, in. 1. 7) L. परमात्मानम् । 8) This line is found in the commensary of Goyicandra's mangalacarana verse. 9) Doloi has तादिरूपासु ।

Page #61

संक्षिप्तसारे प्राकृताध्यायः
[I. 1तत्रेदानी संपूर्ण-संस्कृत-भाषा-लक्षण समाप्य लक्षणान्तरम् आरभते समृद्धीत्यादि। (समृद्धयादेरादिरकारो आद् वा भवति लोकानुसारात् प्राकृते )।
ननु सबै रेषा प्रयोक्तव्या भाषा वृद्धानुसारतो ग्रन्थशेषेणैव संस्कृतभाषालक्षणस्य शिष्टप्रयोगस्य विधानमवशेष उक्तस्तत् किमर्थ लक्षणान्तराणीत्यत* आह लोकानुसारात् प्राकृत इति । संस्कृते समृद्धिशब्दस्य केवलस्य कचिदप्यादिभूतस्याकारस्य आविधानं नास्तीति। अतः पारिशेष्यात् प्राकृत एवायं विधिद्रष्टव्यः। एतदपि लोकानुसारान् नाटकादौ महाकवि-प्रयोग-दर्शनात् प्राकृतं महाराष्ट्रदेशीयं प्रकृष्टभाषणम् । तथा च दण्डी-महाराष्ट्राश्रयां भाषां प्रकृष्टं प्राकृतं विदुरिति, तथा आभीरादिगिरः काव्येष्वपभ्रश इति स्थितिरिति ॥
'सामिद्धीति समृद्धिरिति । प्रकृतेः ऋष्यादेराकृतिगणत्वाद् ऋष्यादेरिति (1. 32) भृतः स्थाने इकारः। लुक् कादियं तस्येति (II. 46) युक्तस्यादि-दकारलुक् । द्विरनादौ प्राग युक्तोऽरादिरिति (II. 105) धकारस्य द्वित्वम् । धकारद्वयवानयं शब्दः। अथवा संस्कृतवच्छेष इति वर्गस्यादिः पदान्तेऽङ्ये चेति: धकारस्य तकारः। अपदान्तेऽपि धादा वित्यादिना तस्य द इत्येवं दकारयुक्त-धकारान्तोऽयम्। भिस्सुपोरपि दीर्घश्चेति (III. 21) इकारस्य ईकारः। सोर्नित्यमिति (III. 21) सुलुक् । हसोः स्थानीयो विसर्गोऽपि सुपदेनोक्त इति । समृद्धयादिगणमाह प्रकट इत्यादि । एकादश समृद्धयादयः। एतेनैतत् प्रतिपादितं संस्कृतभाषा लक्षणसिद्धयान्येव समग्रपदानि विधेयप्राकृतपदानां प्रकृतय इति। आदौ प्राथमिकत्वेन स्वरकार्यमेव विधातुमुचितमिति स्वरकार्यमुक्तवान् ॥
___ 1) L gives आरेभे। 2) Found in the foot-note of L. P. 16. 3) S. विधीनाम. 4) S. लक्षणान्येतानि । 5) S. प्राकृत एव। 6) This is found in S and L (PP. 16-17). 7) 'This paragraph is found only in S. 8) Vide SS. सुवन्तपाद Su. No. 128. 9) Vide ss. सन्धिपाद Su. No. 188.

Page #62

Vr.I.
8 RT.I.1.2 Mk. I.4
Ec. I.46 T.I. 2. 11
-I. 5]
स्वरकार्यम् इत् पक्कादेः ॥२॥ पक्कादेरादिरकार इद् भवति ॥ पिक्कं पक्वम् ॥ ईषत् वेतस स्वप्न व्यजन मृदङ्ग अङ्गार ॥ [ईसि। वेडिस। सिविण । विअण। मुइंग। इंगाल।]
टीका। इत्। पिक्कमिति प्रकृतेः आयु पान्त-लवरः (II. 47) इति 'वकारलुक् । द्विरनादौ प्रागयुक्तोऽरादिरिति ( II. 105 ) ककारस्य द्विरुक्तिः। संस्कृत-[वच्छेष इति ॥
।
Vr. I.4 RT.I.1.6 Mk.I.6
Hc.1.66 T.I.2.4
लुगरण्यस्य ॥३॥ . रणं ॥ अरण्यम् ॥
शय्यादेरेत् ॥४॥
Vr. I.5. RT.I.1.3 Mk. I.7
Ho. I.67 T.I.2.26
शय्यादेरादिरकार एद् भवति ॥ सेन्जा शय्या ॥ आश्चर्य पर्यन्त सौन्दर्य उत्कर [ वल्ली ]3 कियत् स्तोकमात्र वृन्त इत्यादि। [ अच्छेर। पेरंत । सुदेर। उक्कर। वेल्ली। केत्तिअ। थोअमेत्त। वेंट।]
टीका। सेजा। शषयोः सः ( II. 100 ) इति सः ।।
Vr.I.26 RT.I. 1. 14 Mk. I.32
Ho.I.128 T.I.2.71
ऊ५ पुरस्य ॥॥ णेउरं ॥ नूपुरम् ॥
टीका। नूपुरशब्दस्य मरेद् भवति । लोपोऽनाद्ययुग्वर्गादितृतीययोरिति (II. 1) पकारलुक् । उकारस्य प्रकृत्यवस्थानम् ॥
1) As the manuscript S is incomplete in this respect, it has been -supplied by me to complete the sense. 2) Not found in A. 3) Emended by me. ABCO.P. वन्दी। 4) Found only in S.

Page #63

संक्षिप्तसारे प्राकृताध्यायः
Vr. I. 22 RT. I. 1. 18 Mk. I. 26
मुकुटादेरुद्' अत् ||६|| मुकुटादेरादिकारोऽद् भवति ॥ मउड मुकुटम् ॥ मुकुल युधिष्ठिर सौकुमार्य सोअमल्ल । अवरि ।
उपरि गुरु गुरुक बाहु ॥ [ मउल । जहिट्ठिल ।
गय । गरुअ । बाहा | ]
2
टीका । लोपो ऽनाद्ययु गित्यादिना ककारलुक् । टो डः इति टस्य डः ।।
मयूरादेरोद् वानन्तरैः ||७||
अनन्तरैर्वणैः सह मयूरादेरादिरद् ओद् वा भवति ॥ पक्षे मयूरो वा ॥ चतुर्थी चतुर्दशी [ चोत्थी
Vr. I. 8-9
RT. I. 1. 4-6 Mk. I. 11-12
Ho. 1. 171 Comm. T. I. 3. 5
मोरो मऊरो वा । चउत्थी । चोद्दही
उद्दही । ]
मोरो इति मयूर - प्रकृतेर्म इत्यस्याकारो म् इत्यनेनानन्तरवर्णेन सह अता सोरिति ओकारः । पक्षे मऊरो इति यस्यायादेव ( II. 3 ) इति पक्षे य-लुक् । ऊकारस्य स्थितिः ॥
टीका । ओकारः ।
[I, 6
Ho. I. 107 T. I. 2. 58

Vr. I. 6-7
RT. I. 1. 4. Mk. I. 8-9

लवण - बदरयोर्नित्यम् ||८||
लोणं । बोरं ॥ लवणम् । बदरम् ॥
टीका | बकार - दकाराभ्यां सह लकार - बकारयोरकारस्य स्थाने ओत् । सोरिति (III. 2 ) न तस्य ओकारः ॥
5
Vr. I. 10
RT. I. 1. 6-7 Mk. I. 18
Hc. I. 170 T. I. 3. 4
अता
ह्रस्वो यथादेरात् ||६||
यथादेराद् ह्रस्वो वा भवति ॥ जह जहा वा यथा ॥ तथा सर्वथा अन्यथा प्राकृत हालिक उत्खात खादित प्रहार चाटु वाचाट प्रस्तार प्रवाह मार्जार
Ho. I. 67 T. I. 2. 37
(1) P. मुकुटादेरत्; BCC S. रुतू । 2) Found only in S. 3) रादि is not found in A. B has रद् ओवा भवति, मउरी 1 4) Found only in A. 5) Found only in S. 6) वा is not found in B. CC1 मवति वा । 7 ) B. उत्खात and उत्कट |

Page #64

-I. 11 ]
स्वरकार्यम्
1
तालवृन्त चामर वराकी स्थापित कुमारी इत्यादि ] || [ तह तहा । सव्वह सव्वहा अण्णह अण्णा । पअअ पाअअ । हलिअ हालिअ । उक्खअ उक्खा | खदिअ खादिअ । पहर पहार । चड्डु चाडु । वाअड वाआड | पत्थर पत्थार । पवह पवाह । मज्जर मज्जार । तलवेंट तालवेंट । चमर चामर । वरई वराई | थविअ थाविअ । कुमरी कुमारी । ]
1
टीका । आदिर्ज इति यस्य जः । खादिर्ह इति खस्य ह: 2 | आदिना
पारिजातः परिजाओ पारिजाओ ||
सदा शब्दस्येद् वा ॥१०॥
सइ सआ वा ॥ सदा ॥
टीका । लोपोऽनाद्ययुग्वर्गादितृतीययोरिति दकारलुक् ॥
Vr. I. 11 RT.I.1.8 Mk. 1. 14
पानीयादेरीत् ॥११॥
पानीयादेरीद् ह्रस्वो भवति ॥ पाणिअं पानीयम् ॥ द्वितीय तृतीय इत्यादि ॥ [ अलिअ । करिस । दुइअ ।
Vr. I. 18
RT. I. 1. 11 Mk. I. 21

५

Ho. I. 72 T. I. 2. 34
Ho. I. 101 T. I. 2. 51-2
टीका | णोऽयुग्मस्य ( II. 103 ) इति नस्य णः । यस्यायादेर्वा (II. 3) इति यलुक् पाक्षिकः॰ ॥
अलीक करीष
तइअ । ]
1) C. कुमार्यादिः ; others कुमारादि । 2) Found only in S. 3) Found in S1 only. 4) After this P has जइ नआ ; तइ तथा But it is not found in any other manuscripts. Besides the sutra itself gives the prescription only for the word I. Hence these have not been included. 5) Found in S. 6) B. इत् । It is evidently a mistake, because in the वृत्ति we find long ई 1 BP. तृतीय इत्यादि ; others तृतीयेत्यादि । 8) Found only in S.
7 )

Page #65

संक्षिप्तसारे प्राकृताध्यायः
[I. 12
गभीरादेर्वा ॥१२॥
Ho.1. 101 T.I.2.51-52
Vr. I. 18 RT.I.1.11 Mk. I. 21
(Comm)
गहिरं गहीरं वा 1 गभीरम् ॥ ब्रीडित महीतल ॥ [ विडिअ वीडिअ । महिअल महीअल ।]
टीका। खादिह इति भस्य हः। गहिरं 2 ॥
Vr.1.24 RT.I.1.14 Mk. I.30
c. I. 122 T.I.2.70
ऊ नित्यं मधूकस्य ॥१३॥ महुअ ॥ मधूकम् ॥
टीका। खादिर्ह इति धस्य हः। लोपोऽनाद्ययुगवर्गादितृतीययोरिति ( II. 1) ककारलुक्॥
आद्-ईद्-ऊतश्च संयुक्त ॥१४॥ Pu. IV. T. Ho. I. 24-85
T.I.2.40-41
कज । करणिज । सुज्जो ॥ कार्यम्। करणीयम् । सूर्यः ।।
टीका। संयुक्त परे आदीदूतश्च ह्रस्वो भवति । ज्जो र्यस्य इति यस्य ज इत्यादेशः ॥
नीडादेरेत् ॥१॥ नीडादेरी एकारो भवति ॥ णेड्ड नीडम् ॥ आपीड कीदृश ईदृश ।। [आमेल (II. 6 )। केरिस। एरिस । ]
टीका। पक्षिणो वासवाचिनीडमिति प्रकृतेः द्विनीडाद्युपान्तोयौवनवश्चेति (II. 108 ) डस्य द्वित्वम् ।।
Vr. I. 19 RT. I. 1.10 Mk. I.23
Hc. I.105-6 T.I.2.56
1) P. गहीरं गहिर वा। 2) Found only in S. 3) AP. उनित्यम् etc. 4) B. माहु ।) 5) Found in S only. 6) BP. नेड्डा

Page #66

-I. 20]
स्वरकार्यम्
V. I. 12 RT.I. 1.8 Mk. I. 15
Hc. I. 85 T.I.2.41
c. I. 92
Vr. I. 17 RT. I.1.10 Mk. I. 20
पिण्डादेरिद् एद्' वा ॥१६॥ पिण्डादेरिद् एद् वा भवति ॥ पिंड पेंड पिण्डम् ॥ किंशुक रिष्टिः पिष्ट सिन्दूर विष्णु धम्मिल्ल बिल्व' ।। [किंसुअ केसुअ। रिट्टि रेट्टि। पिट्ठ पेट्ठ। सिंदूर सेंदूर। विण्हु वेण्हु । धम्मिल्ल धम्मेल्ल । बिल्ल बेल्ल ।]
दीर्घो जिह्वा-सिंहयोः ॥१७॥ RI. 1. 10 जीहा। सीहो ॥ वकारानुस्वारयोर्मुक् ॥ जिह्वा । सिंहः ।।
टीका । ननु भो ह्रस्य (II. 96) इत्यादिना विशेष विधित्वाद् ब्भ इत्यादेशः कथं न स्यादित्यत आह वकारेति बहुलाधिकारादिति शेषः ॥
अत् पथ्यादेः ॥१८॥ पथ्यादेरिद अद् भवति ॥ पहो पन्था ॥ हरिद्रा पृथिवी॥ [हलहा । पुहई।] टीका। खादिर्ह इति थस्य हः ।
अद् इतेरन्तः ॥१६॥ वाक्यादौ पदादौ वा प्रयुक्तस्येति10 शब्दस्यान्त इद्11 अद् भवति ।। इअ परिभाविअ सुइरं ॥ इति परिभाव्य सुचिरम्12 ॥
VI. I. 13 RT. I.1.9. Mk. I.16
He. I. 88 r.I.2.43
Vr.I.14 RT. I. 1.9. Mk. I. 17
Ho. I.91 I. I. 2.45
Vr.1.14 Ho. 1.42 Mk. I.17 T.I.2.6-7
(comm)
M.1.
अनादेरादिलुग13 द्विश्च तः ॥२०॥ अह14 स त्ति ॥ अथ स इति150
..2.6
____ 1) BPL.-रीद्वा 2) B.-रीद् वा । 3) B. रिष्ट , विष्ट | 4) B. धर्मिल्ल | 5) ACCI विल्व : S1 विल्ल ; L. विन्द, विन्दु (१)। 6) B.-हिंसयोः। 7) Found in S1 only. 8) Found in S only. 9) After this ACChave वा। 10) B. इति शब्दस्य । 11) B. इद् भवति । 12) Not found in CC1. 13) B.-दिः। 14) B.-अहँ । 15) Not found in BC1.

Page #67

संक्षिप्तसारे प्राकृताध्यायः
[I. 21
Vr. I. 16 RT.I.1.9 Mk. I. 19
Hc. I, 97 T. I. 2. 49
उदोच' धातु-प्राग-द्विधेत्यस्य ॥२१॥ R i . 2.19 धातु-प्राग-भूतस्य द्विधा-शब्दस्य इद् उद् भवति। ओच्च ॥ द्विधाकृतम् दुहाक दोहाकवा॥
उद् इतु-वृश्चिकयोः ।।२२॥
Vr. I.16 cp.V.I.28 RT. I.1.9 Mk. I. 18
Fe. I. 128 Hc. I. 95. He. II.16 T.I.2.485 cp.T.I.2.7 T.I. 4. 18
Vr. I. 20 RT. I. 1.12 Mk. I. 24
He. I.116 T.I.2.65
T.I.3.5
RP. I. 1. 13 Mk. I. 25
उच्छू। विचुंओ ॥ इक्षुः। वृश्चिकः ।।
तुण्डादेस्त ॥२३॥ तुण्डादेरुद् ओद् भवति ॥ तोंडं तुण्डम् ॥ मुस्त+ मुक्ता पुष्कर पुस्तक लुब्धक कुसुम्भ कुन्तल कुट्टिम दुर्दान मुद्गर कुण्डादि ॥ [ मोत्थ। मोत्ता। पोक्खर। पोत्थअ। लोद्ध। कोसुम्ह । कोंतल। कोट्टिम। दोदाण । मोग्गर। कोंड। टीका। आदिना सुकुमारः सोउमारो ॥
Vr. I. 21 He. I. 171 द्वा वोदूखले ॥२४॥ उदूखलशब्दे' दूकारेण सह उद् ओद् वा भवति ॥ ओक्खल उलूहल (II. 16 ) वा रदूखलम् ॥
टीका। उदूखलं तत्पुरुषादावित्यादिना द्वित्वम् ॥ . ऊद्' -अद्-दुकूले'' द्विर्लश्च ॥२॥ N.I.H_...100
दुकूलशब्दे ऊद् अद् वा भवति ॥ अस्मिन् पक्षे लकारो द्विश्च ॥ दुऊल दुअल्ल वा ॥ दुकूलम् ॥
1) B. उदोश्च । 2) P. उच्छु । 3) P. विच्चुओ ABCCI विञ्चुओ। 4) B. सुप्त । 5) B. दुईन । 6) Found only in S1 7) P.-खले शब्दे । 8) ABCC1. उदूखलं वा। 9) Found in S1 only. 10) AB. उत् etc. 11) A.-दुलोके (wrong).
Vr. I. 25 Mk. I.31
Ho. I. 119 T.I.2.67

Page #68

Vr. I. 23 Hc. I. 111 RT.I.1.13. I. I. 2. 59 Mk. I.28
Vr.1.27 RT. I.1.14 Mk. I.33
H c. I.126 T.1.2.73
Vr. I. 30 RT. I. 1.14 Mk. I. 36
. I. 140 T.I. 2.89
-I. 31] .
स्वरकार्यम् इत् पुरुषमध्ये' नित्यम् ॥२६॥ पुरिसो ॥ पुरुषः॥ टीका। पुरुषशब्दस्य मध्यस्थित उकारो नित्यमिद् भवति ॥
ऋत् ॥२७॥ ऋकारोऽद् भवति ।। तणं ॥ तृणम् ॥
केवलो रिः ॥२८॥ रिद्धी ॥ ऋद्धिः॥
तादृशादेश्च ।।२६।। तारिसो। जारिसो ॥ तादृशः। यादृशः॥
उद् ऋत्वादेश्च ॥३०॥ ऋत्वादेः ऋद् उद् भवति ॥ उदुकालो ऋतुकालः ॥ मृतु मृणाल पृथिवी वृन्दावन वृन्दारक प्रावृत विवृतः संवृत प्रावृष संभृति प्रवृत्ति भ्रात जामात मात्र यात वृद्धि निवृत्ति वृत्तान्त प्राभृत परभृत मृत वृत प्रभृति मृद्॥ [ उदु। मुणाल । पुहई । बुंदावण । वुदारअ। पावुअ । विवुअ। संवुअ । पाउस। संहुदि। पउत्ति । भाउ। जामाउ । माउ। जाउ। बुद्धि । णिवुत्ति । वुत्तंत । पाहुत्त । परहुअ। मुअ । वुअ । पहुदि । मुआ।]
ऊद् ऋणस्य ॥३॥ ऊणं11 ॥ ऋणम् ॥
Vr.I.31 Hc. I. 142 RT.I.1.15T.I.2.90
Vr. I. 29 RT. I.1.17 Mk. I.35
Ho.1.131 T.I.2.80
He. I. 141 T. I.2.91
1) BP. मध्योन्नित्यम् । 2) Found only in S1. 3) This sutra is not found in B. 4) B. त्वादेः। 5) B. ऋत्यादेर ऋत् । 6) Not found in ABC01. 7) Not found in C1. 8) Not found in B. 10) Not found in B. 10) P. उद | 11) P. उणं ।

Page #69

संक्षिप्तसारे प्राकृताध्यायः
[I. 32
Vr. I. 28H RT. I. 1. 15 ME.I.34
. I. 128 T. I. 2.75
Vr. I.83 RT. I. 1. 19 Mk. I.39-40
He. I. 145 T.I. 2.92
Vr. I.34 RT. I.1.19 ME. I.41
Ho. I.146 T.I.2.93
- ऋष्यादेरित् ॥३२॥
अध्यादेः ऋद्' इद् भवति ।। इसि ऋषिः॥ गृष्टि दृष्टि सृष्टि मृगाङ्क कृत हृदय ममृण वितृष्ण बृहित कृषर कृष्ण कृत्य भृत्य वृष्टि वृश्चिक कृति हृति तृप्ति भृङ्ग भृङ्गार शृङ्गार शृगाल कृपा कृपाण ॥ [ गिट्ठि। दिट्ठि। सिट्टि । मिअक। किअकअ । हिअअ । मसिण। विइण्ह । बिहिअ । किसर । किसण (II. 53) कण्ह ( II. 53)। किश्च । भिच्च । विट्ठि। विचुंअ ( I. 22; II. 65)। किइ । हिइ। तित्ति। भिंग। भिंगार। सिंगार। सिआल । किवा । किवाण ।]
लद् इलिः क्लूप्ति-क्लप्तयोः ॥३३॥ किलित्ती ।। क्लूप्तिः ॥
एद् इद् वा वेदना-देवरयोः ॥३४॥ वेदना-देवरयोरेद् इद् वा भवति ॥ वेअणा विअणा वा। देअरो दिअरो वा ॥ वेदना। देवरः॥
ऐत् ॥३॥ ऐकार एद् भवति ॥ सेवो॥ शैवः ॥
ईद् धैर्ये सैन्धवे ह्रस्वः ॥३६॥ धीरं । सिध ॥ धैर्यम् । सैन्धवम् ।। ____ अइदैत्यादेः ॥३७॥
दैत्यादेः ऐद् अइर्भवति ॥ दइच्चो' दैत्यः ॥ चैत्र भैरव कैरव वैदेशिक वैश्य वैदेही वैशाख वैषयिक वैषम्य वैशम्पायन ॥ [चइत्त । भइरव । कइरव । वइदेसिअ । वइस्स । वइदेही । वइसाह । वइसइअ । वइसम्म । वइसंपाअण । ]
1) C1-रिग् P. ऋत् । 2) B. धृष्टि। 3) After this P has कृष्ण । 4) Not found in B. 5) P. ईद्वा। 6) B. सिन्धवम् । 7) B. दैत्तो।
Mr. I. 35 RT. I. 1.19 Mk. I.42
Hc, IQ 148 T. I.2.101
Vr. I. 39 Ho. I. 155 RT. I.1.21-22 T. I.2.108 Mk. I.45-46
Vr.I.36 RT. I. 1.20 Mk. I. 43
H c. I. 151 T.I.2.103

Page #70

H. I. 163
Vr.1.37 RT. I. 1.21 Mk. I.44
Vr. I. 41 RT.I. 1.22 Mk. I.48
Hỏ. I. 159 T.I.2.101
| VI. I. 40
RT.I.J.22 Mk. I.47
Hc. I. 156 T.I.2.95
-1. 43 ] . स्वरकार्यम्
११ देवे वा ॥३८॥ दइवं दइव्वं देव्वं वा ॥ दैवम् ॥
ओद् औत् ॥३६॥ औकार ओद् भवति ।। कोमुई ॥ कौमुदी ॥
ओद् अद् वा प्रकोष्ठे कश्च वः ॥४०॥ 1.5.22_ii. a. 35 पओट्ठो पवट्ठो वा ॥ प्रकोष्ठः ॥
अउः पौरादेः ॥४॥ पौरादेः औद् अउर्भवति ॥ पउरो पौरः॥ पौरव कौरव पौरुष कौशल इत्यादि ॥ [ पउरव। कउरव । पउरुस। कउसल।]
आ वा गौरवे ॥४२॥ गउरवं गारवं वा ॥ गौरवम् ॥ .
सौन्दर्यादेरुन्नित्यम्' ॥४३॥ सुदेरं सौन्दर्यम् ॥ मौजायन शौण्ड शौण्डिक कौशेयक दौवारिक' इत्यादि ॥ [ मुंजायण। सुड। सुडिअ। कुक्खेअअ। दुवारिअ ।] टीका। शय्यादेरेद् ( I. 4 ) इति एद् भवति ॥
___ इति11 स्वर-कार्य निवृत्तम् ।।
Vr. I. 42 RT. I.1.23 Mk. I.49
He. I. 162 T.I. 2. 106
Vr.I.43 Ho. I.163 RE. I.1.28T.I.2.106 Mk. I.51
Vr. I. 44
c.I. 160 RT. I.1.22-23 T.I. 2.97 Mk. I. 62
1) P. दइवं, दैव्वं ; 81 दइन। 2) P. औदोत् । 3) ABCCI -कश्च रः। 4) B. पवट्टो । 5) P.-रौदुर्भवति । 6) Not found in B. 7) After this
B has नित्यं वा । 8) A. सौण्डिक | 9) CC1. दौवारिकेत्यादि । 10) Found in S only. 11) Nob found in ABOOISS..

Page #71

Vr. II 1-2 Hc.I.177,192 RT. 1.2.1-4 T.I.8.8 ME. II. 1-2 T.I.318
द्वितीयः परिच्छेदः हल्कार्यम्
अयुग्-विधिः लोपोऽनाद्ययुग-वर्गादि-तृतीययोः ॥१॥ 114 अनाद्योरयुजोर्वर्गाणाम् आदितृतीययोोपो भवति ॥ लोओ। विप्पअणो॥ लोकः विप्रगणः ॥ अनाद्ययुग् इति किम्। कालो। सक्को। कालः। शक्यः ॥ कचिद् यत्वं वा। गअणं गयणं वा गगनम् ॥ कचिद् वत्वं वा। सुहओ सूहवो वा सुभगः॥ क्वचिन्न लोपः । पवाओ। सुवाओ। पूजणं। पवित्तं ॥ प्रवातः। सुवाक् । पूजनम् । पवित्रम् ॥
लोपो यमुनाया मस्य ॥२॥ जउणा ॥ यमुना॥
यस्यायादेर्वा ॥३॥ णयणं णअणं वा ॥ नयनम् ॥
Vr. II. 3 RT.1.2.1 Mk. II.3
Ho. I. 178 T.I.3.11
Mk. II. 2. Ho. 1. 130
Comm. T.I.3.10
अज उत्तराव्यय-चस्य ॥४॥ तस्स अ॥ तस्य च ॥
पो वः ॥५॥ अनाद्ययुक् पकारो वो भवति ॥ अवरो। उपरि ॥
Vr. II. 16 RT.I. 2.7 Mk. II. 14
He. I. 281 T.I.3.65
. 1) Not found in B. 2) In P these are given as separate सत्र (Nos. 2-4 ) 3) ACCISSIP. सुहवो। But सु should be long when व follows (ot. II. 138 ). 4) ABCCI P. यउणा। 5) For this सूत्र, vide introduction.

Page #72

१३
Vr. II. 16 RT. I. 2.8 Mk. II. 15
Ho. I. 234 T.I. 8.57
Vr. II. 20 RT.I.2.3 Mk. II.18
He. I. 195 T.I.3.31
Vr. II.21 RT.I. 2.
4 Mk. II.19
c. I. 196 .I.3.27
T
Vr. II. 4,22 Hc. I.186, RT. I.2.12
197 Mk. II. 20 T.I.3.19,25
Vr. II. 23 He. I. 202 Mk. II. 23T.I. 3.30
-II. 13]
हल्कायम् म आपीडे ॥६॥ आमेलो ॥ आपीडः ॥
टो डः ॥७॥ अनाद्ययुक् टकारो डो भवति ॥ विडवो ॥ विटपः ।।
ढः सटा-शकट-कैटभानाम् ॥८॥ सढा । सअढो। केढवो ॥ सटा। शकटः । कैटभः॥
स्फटिकस्य लः ॥६॥ फलिहो॥ स्फटिकः॥
डो लोऽबडिशादेः ॥१०॥ अबडिशादेरनाधयुग डकारो लो भवति ॥ तलाओ तडागः।। अबडिशादेरिति किम्। बडिसो। णिबिडो। जडो॥ बडिशः। निबिडः । जडः॥
खादिर्हः ॥२॥ अनाद्ययुक् खादिर्हो भवति ॥ सुहं सुखम् ॥ घ् ॥ मेहो मेघः ॥ 2 ॥ पुहई पृथिवी।। ।। बोहो बोधः॥ ॥ विहलो विफलः॥ भ। रहसो रभसः ॥ कचिन्न स्यात्। लिखण णिखिल॥ लिखनम् निखिलम् ॥
शिफा-शफरयोर्भः ॥१२॥ शिभा। सभरो ॥ शिफा। शफरः ।।
प्रथमादेः ॥१३॥ पढमो प्रथमः॥ शिथिल निषध औषध दग्ध विदग्धादि॥ [सिढिल । णिसढ। ओसढ। दड्ढ । विअड्ढ । ]
Vr. II. 27 RT.I.2.11 Mk. II.25
He. I. 187 T.I. 3.20
Vr. II. 26 RT. II.1.7 Mk. II. 24
Hc. I. 236 T. I. 3.60
Vr. II.28 Hc. I 55,216 RTI.1.2.4 T.I.2.20
T.I. 3.48
2) In P it is given as a separate
1) In P order is not maintained. सूत्र ( No. 15 ). 3) P. निषेध ।

Page #73

·१४
ठो ढः ||१४|| अनाद्ययुक् ठकारो ढो भवति ॥ सढो ॥ शठः ॥
अङ्कोठे लः ||१५|| अकोल्लो ॥ अङ्कोठः ॥
Vr. II. 12
दो लादिदहदादेः || १६॥ दोहदादेरनाद्ययुग दकारो लादिर्भवति ॥ दोहलो दोहदः ॥ कदम्ब
RT. I. 2. 9 Mk. II.12
प्रदीप्त ॥ [ कलंब । पलित्त । ]
•
रः संख्या- गद्गदयोः ॥१७॥
एआरह | गग्गरो || एकादश । गद्गदः ॥
द्यस्य ज्जः || १८ |
विज्जा ॥ विद्या ॥
संक्षिप्तसारे प्राकृताध्यायः
को हार्दिर्निकषादेः || २०॥
चंदिमा ॥ चन्द्रिका ॥
भः शीकरस्य ॥ २२॥
सीभरो ॥ शीकरः ॥
1) B. विकुल ।
निकषादेः ककारो हादिर्भवति ॥ चिकुर ॥ [ फलिह । विहल | चिहुर । ]
मश्चन्द्रिकायाः ||२१||

Vr. II. 24 RT. 1. 2.4 Mk. II. 21
Vr. II. 25 RT. I. 2. 9 Mk. I. 22
Vr. II.13-14 RT. I. 2. 8 Mk. II. 13
Vr. III. 17, 27 Pu. III. 3. RT. I. 3. 7 Mk. III. 31
Vr. III. 26 Ho.II. 37, 86
गर्दभादेर्डः ||१६||
Pu. III. 1.
RT. I. 3. 10 MK. III. 30.
गड्डो गर्दभः ॥ संमर्द वितर्दि विच्छर्दि ॥ [ संमड्डु |
विच्छड्डि । ]
[II. 14
Ho. I. 199 T. I. 3. 28
Vr. II. 6. RT. I. 2. 8. Mk. II. 5.
Vr. II. 6.
RT. 1. 2. 7. Mk. II. 6
Ho. I. 200 T. I. 3. 26

Ho. I. 221 T. I. 3. 41
विअड्डि ।
Vr.II. 4, 22. Ho. I. 186, 197
RT. I. 2. 12.
T. I. 3. 19,
25.
Mk. II. 6.
णिहसो निकषः ॥ स्फटिक विकल 1
Ho.I.219 T.I. 8. 42
H. II. 24
T.I. 4. 24
Ho. I. 185. T. I. 3. 16.
Hc. 1. 184 T. 1. 8. 17

Page #74

-II. 29]
प्रत्यादेस्तकारो डादिर्भवति ॥ पडिबद्धो प्रतिबद्धः गर्त्त ॥ [ पाहुड | वेडस | पडाआ। गड्ड । ]
वसति-भरतयोर्हः ||२६||
हल्कार्यम्
भो वः कैटभस्य || २३ ॥
केवो ॥ कैटभः ॥
Hc. I. 209 Comm.
ऋत्वादेस्तो दः || २४ ॥
T. I. 3. 49 Comm.
ऋत्वादेस्तकारो दो भवति ॥ उद् ऋतुः ॥ रजत आगत निवृत सुरत मरकत सुकृत संयत विवृति प्रवृति आवृति आकृति विधृति संहृति निवृत्ति निष्पत्ति संपत्ति प्रतिपत्ति इत्यादि ॥ [ रअद । आअद । णिव्वद । सुरद । मरअद् । सुकद | संजद । विवदि । पविदि । आवदि । आकदि । विहदि । संहदि । विद्दि | णिपछि | संपद्दि | पडिपछि । ]
टीका | आदिना श्रुतं सुदं, ख्यातिः खादी, तातः तादो, साम्प्रतं संपदं, प्रतारितः परिदो ॥
डादिः प्रत्यादेः ||२५||
वसही । भरहो ॥ वसतिः । भरतः ॥
णो गर्भितैरावतयोः ॥२७॥
गमिणो । एरावणो ॥ गर्भितः । ऐरावतः ||
त्यस्य चः ॥ २८ ॥
सच्चं ॥ सत्यम् ॥
त्वस्य चत्वरे वा ॥ २६॥
Vr, II. 21,29. RT. 1. 2. 7. Mk. II, 28

Vr. II. 7 RT. 1. 2. 5 Mk. II. 7
Vr. II. 8 &
III. 25 Mk. II. 10
॥
Vr. II. 9 RT. I. 2. 12 Mk. II. 9
Vr.II 10-11 RT. 1. 2. 5 Mk. II. 11
प्राभृत वेतस पताका
Vr. III. 27 Pu. III. 2. RT. I. 3. 4 Mk. III. 81
१५
Hc. I. 240 T. I. 3. 64
RT. I. 3. 4 Mk. III. 58

Hc. 2. 206 T. I. 3. 33
Hc. I.214 T.1.8.88-89
Ho. I. 208 T.1.3.50 51
Ho. II. 13
T. I. 4. 17
3
चच्चरं चत्तरं वा ॥
1) Found only in S1. 2) After this S1 P. गब्मिणी । 3) P. चत्वरम् ( wrong ).
Hc. II. 12
T. I. 4. 16

Page #75

संक्षिप्तसारे प्राकृताध्यायः
[ II. 30
Vr.III. 22,24 RT. I. 3.8 Mk. III. 27
Ho. II. 30 T. I. 4. 80
Vr. III. 23 Mk. III. 28.
Vr. II. 50 He. I. 254 RE. I. 2. 9-10 T.I.3. 77-78 Mk. II. 29
ट्टो तस्याधूर्तादेः ॥३०॥ वट्टइ वर्तते ॥ धूर्तादेस्तु धुत्तो॥ कीर्ति वर्तन आवर्त मूर्ति निर्वर्तित वर्तमान संवर्त अन्तर्वर्ती कर्ता कर्तरि इत्यादि ॥ [ कित्ति । वत्तण। आवत्त । मुत्ति । णिब्वत्तिअ । वत्तमाण । संवत्त । अंतव्वत्ती। कत्तार । कत्तरि ।] टोका। आदिना मुहूर्तादेर्ग्रहणम् । मुहूर्त मुहुत्तं ।।।
पत्तनस्य च ॥३॥ पट्टणं ॥ पत्तनम्॥
रो लो हरिद्रादेः ॥३२॥ हरिद्रादीनां रेफो लो भवति ॥ हलद्दा हरिद्रा । तरुण मुखर सुकुमार युधिष्ठिर अङ्गार दरिद्र परिघ परिखा किरात ॥ [ तलुण । मुहल। सोमाल । जहिट्ठिल । इंगाल । दलिद्द । फलिह । फलिहा। चिलाअ।]
टीका। सोमालो इत्यत्र मयूरादेरोद वानन्तरैः (I. 7) इति कुवर्णेन सह .. उकारस्य ओकारः ॥
यो ज्जो वोत्तरीयानीयतीयानाम् ॥३३॥ RI.2.s. Fi.3.68 उत्तरीयानीय-तीयानां यकारो ज्जो वा भवति ॥ उत्तरी उत्तरिज वा। करणी करणिज्ज वा। तिइज्जं तिइ वा ॥ उत्तरीयम् । करणीयम् । तृतीयम् ॥
द्वे दुइज्जे वा ॥३४॥ दुइज्जं दुइ वा। अन्यत्र बी वा ॥ द्वितीयम् ॥
टीका। अत्र ज्ज-कारपरत्वाभावाद् बीयमिति लुक्कादियुक्तस्येति (II. 46) दकारलोपः। आद्य पान्त-लवरः (II. 47 ) इति प्राप्त वकारलोपाभावस्तकारे लप्त सवर्णेन दीर्घत्वमेतत् सर्व निपातनीयमिति शेषः ॥
Vr. II.17 RT.I.2.3. Mk. II.16
Ho. I.248 T.I.3.68
Vr. I. 18 RT.I. 2.8 Mk. II. 16.
Comm.
c. I. 101
Comm.
1) In ABCCISSIP these two सूत्र (30-31) are given in one सत्र (No. 34). 2) Found in SS1 3) Found only in S1. 4) P. तिइज्जं तिइकं वा S1 तिइय 5) P. रीय (wrong). 6) Found in Sonly.

Page #76

Vr. II.31 RT. I. 2. 14 Mk. II.30
Hc. 1. 245 T. I. 3.74
Vr. II.82 RT. I. 2. 14 Mk. II.31
Hc. I, 247 T. I. 3.71
Vr. II.34 RT.I.2.14 Mk. II. 83
Hc. I. 181 T.I.3.12
Vr. II.33 RT. I. 2.14 Mk. II.32
Hc. I. 183 T.I. 3. 13
-II. 42 ]
हल्कार्यम् आदिजः ॥३॥ आदिर्यकारो जो भवति ॥ जसो॥ यशः॥
लो यष्टः ॥३६॥ लट्ठी ॥ यष्टिः॥
खादिः कुब्जादेः ॥३॥ कुब्जादेरादिः खादिर्भवति ॥ खुन्जा ॥ कुब्जा ॥
चः किरातस्य ॥३८॥ चिलाओ॥ किरातः॥
दोलादेर्डः ॥३६॥ डोला दोला ॥ दण्ड दहन दशन ॥ [ डंड। डहण । डसण।]
फा परुषादेः ॥४०॥ फरुसं परुषम् ।। परिघ परिखा ।। [फलिह । फलिहा।]
बिसिन्यादेर्भः ॥४॥ मिसिणी॥ बिसिनी॥ मन्मथे वः ॥४२॥
H
Vr. II. 35 RT.I.2.16 Mk. II. 34-35
. I. 217 T.I.3.35
Vr. II.86 RT. I.2.16 Mk. II. 36
He. I.282 T.I.8.66
Vr. II. 88 RT. I 2.16 Mk. II. 87
Hc. I. 238 T.I.3.63
Vr. II. 39 RT. I. 2. 16 Mk. II. 38
Hc. I. 242 T. I. 3.66
वम्महो । मन्मथः ॥
1) P. षट: (wrong). 2) B. पुरुषादेः 1 3) B. फुरिसो ; P. फरुषं(?) ।
2

Page #77

संक्षिप्तसारे प्राकृताध्यायः
[II. 43
Vr. II.41 RT.I.2.16 Mk. II. 40
Ho.1.49.265 T.I.2.18 . I. 8.90
He, I. 256
Vr. II.40 RT.I.2.16 Mk. II. 39
T. I. 3. 82
Vr. I. 32 &
III. 81
Ho. II. 197
छः षडादेः॥४३॥ छ षट् ॥ षष्ठ शाव सप्तपर्ण ॥ [ छछ। छाव। छत्तवण्ण । ] टीका। षट्पदः छप्पदो इत्यादीनामेवं साध्यम् ॥
णो लागलादेः ॥४४॥ णंगलं । णोहलो ॥ लोहलः स्याद् अस्फुटवाग इत्यमरः ॥
वृक्षस्य सस्वरो रुर्वा ॥४॥ RT.. वृक्षशब्दस्यादिवर्णः स्वरसहितो रुर्वा भवति ॥ रुकखो वच्छो वा ॥ वृक्षः।
[अथ युक्तविधिः ] लुक् कादियुक्तस्य ॥४६॥
युक्तस्यादिः ककारादिलुंग भवति ॥ भुत्त ॥ग ॥ दुद्धं । ड्॥ खग्गो । त् ॥ उप्पत्ती ॥।। गग्गरो ।।प्॥ समत्त ॥ ॥ ट्ठि,रो ॥स् ॥ पत्थर।। भुक्तम्। दुग्धम् । खड्गः । उत्पत्तिः । गद्गदः । समाप्तम् । निष्ठुरः । प्रस्तरम् ॥
Vr. III.
B He. II. 79 आधु पान्त-लवरः॥४७॥ उक्का । पिक्क । चकं ॥ उल्का । पकम् । चक्रम् ॥
टीका। युक्तस्यादिभूता उपान्तभूता वान्तस्वरात् प्राक् स्थिता ये लवरा इति त्रयो वर्णास्तेषां लोपो भवति ॥
उपान्त-मनयश्च ॥४८॥ जुग्गं । भग्गो। संखा ।। युग्मम् । भमः । संख्या ।
Vr. III.1 RT.I 3.1 Mk. III.1.
He. II.77 T. I.4.77
T.I.4.78
RTI.3.1 Mk. III.3
Vr. III.2 RT. I. 3. I Mk. III. 2
Ho. II.78 T.I.4.79
___1) Found in S1 only. 2) P. लोहल। 3) Not found in B. 4) This vrtti is found in the margin of S1 only. 5) P. पत्थानं । 6) Found in S, only.

Page #78

Vr. III.8 RT.I.8.1 Mk. III.
B
Op.
T
c. 1.66 (Vrtti) .I.2.17
-II 54] हल्कार्यम्
१६ जा' सर्वज्ञादेः ॥४॥ सव्वजो । अहिज्जो। सुज्जो । जाण ॥ सर्वज्ञः। अभिज्ञः । सुज्ञः। ज्ञानम् ॥
श्मशानादेः शः ॥५०॥ मसाण । मस्सू ॥ श्मशानम् । श्मश्रुः॥
मध्याह्न हः ॥५१॥ मज्झण्णो ॥ मध्याह्नः ॥
Vr. III.6 RT.I.8.2 Mk. III.7
Ho. II.88 T.I.4.76
Vr, III.7 RT. I. 3.2 Mk. III.8
Hc. II.84 T.I.4.81
वियुक् क्लिष्टादेः परस्वरश्च ॥५२॥
Vr. III.60 Ho. II. 101 Pu. III. 27T.1.4,96-96 RTI.3.17 Mk. III. 77
क्लिष्टादेर्युक्तस्यादिवियुग भवति ॥ परस्वर इतरस्य स्वरश्च भवति । किलिट्ठो क्लिष्टः ॥ श्लिष्ट रत्न क्रिया शाङ्ग ॥ [ सिलिट्ठ । रअण। किरिआ। सारंग।]
कृष्ण वा ॥३॥ कण्हो कसणो किसणो वा ॥ कृष्णः ॥ टीका । ऋत् ( I. 27 ) इति अकारः ॥ क्ष्मादेह स्वश्च ॥५४॥
Vr. III.61 Rr. I. 3. 16 Mk. III. 78
Ho. II. 110 T. I. 4. 104
Ho. II 18 101,104
Vr. III. 63 Pu. III. 80 RT.1.3.16 Mk. III. 42
खमा॥ श्लाघा क्लेश ही श्री स्त्री॥ [ सलाहा। किलेस। हिरी। सिरी। इत्थिरी ]
टीका। आदावप्यत्र इकारस्य पृथग वियुक्तत्वं लोकानुसारात् ॥
1) P. जः। 2) P. स: (wrong). 3) Found in s only. 4) इत्थिरी is iound in S1 only. 5) This tika is found in S1 and in the foot-note of P.

Page #79

संक्षिप्तसारे प्राकृताध्यायः
[II. 55
स्नेहे वा ॥५॥
Vr. III. 64 Hc. II. 102 Pu.III.31T.I.4.97 RT. 1.3.18 Mk. III.67
सिणेहो हो वा ॥ स्नेहः॥ टीका। आदावप्यत्र इकारस्य पृथग वियुक्तत्वं लोकानुसारात् ॥
क्लान्त्यादेरित्वान् ॥५६॥
Vr. III. 62 Hc. II. 106 Pu. III. 28-29 T. I.4.101 RT. I. 3.17 Mk. III.80
RT. I. 3.18 Mk. III.89
किलंतो क्लान्तः॥ ग्लान म्लान स्वप्न गर्दा अर्हा हर्ष इत्यादि। [ गिलाण । मिलाण । सिविण । गरिहा । अरिहा। हरिस।]
टीका। प्रक्रान्तत्वादादियुक्तत्वम् । अत्रादि-ग्रहणात् सर्षपः सरिसओ, स्पर्शः फरिसो फंसो वा, दर्शनं दरिसण दंसण वा, आदर्शः आअरिसो, उत्कर्षः3 उक्करिसो, वर्षवरः वरिसवरी इत्यादीनां ग्रहणम् ॥
स्नानादेर्वा ॥५७॥ पहाणं सिणाणं वा स्नानम् । अग्गी अगिणी वा अग्निः ॥ सुत्थं सुसित्थं वा सुस्थ्यम् ॥ टीका। बहुलाधिकारादस्य विधेरनित्यत्वादग्गीत्यादौ न भवति ॥
ज्यायामीत्वान् ॥८॥ जीआ जीया वा ॥ ज्या॥ टीका। यस्यायादेर्वा ( II. 3 ) ॥
Vr. III.66 RT. I. 8.19 Mk. III. 93
Ho. II. 115 T.I.4.110
1) P. ण्णे हो। 2) Found in S1 only. 3) P reads उत्कृष्टः। 4) Thia tika from अत्रादि to ग्रहणम् is found in si. and in the foot-note of P. where it begins with आदिना and ends in वरिसवरो। 5) Found in 81 only. 6) BS, जीया। 7) Found in s only.

Page #80

२१
-II 65] . हल्कार्यम्
तन्व्यादेरुत्वान् ॥५६॥
Vr. III. 66 Pu. III. 32 RT.I.8.19 Mk. III.94
HO.II. 113 . I. 4
106-10T
तणुइ। गरुइ । रुक्खं । पदुमं ॥ तन्वी। गुर्वी । वृक्षः। पद्मम् ॥
प्पादिरात्मादेः ॥६॥
Vr. III. 48-49 Pu. III. 18, 17 RT. I. 3. 11 Mk. III.61
Vr. III.63 RT.I.3.11 Mk. III.72
Ho. II.66 T.I.4.49
Ho. II.38
Vr. III.46 RT. I.3.9 Mk. III. 64
आत्मादेर्युक्तस्य स्थाने प्पादिर्भवति ॥ अप्पा । रुप्पं ॥ आत्मा । रुक्मम् ॥
म्बस्ताम्राम्रयोः ॥६॥ तंबं । अंबं । ताम्रम् । आम्रम् ॥
न्दो ण्डो भिन्दिपाले ॥२॥ भिंडिवालो ॥ भिन्दिपालः॥
पञ्चाशत्-पञ्चदशयोणः ॥६॥ पण्णासा' । पण्णरह ॥ पञ्चाशत् । पञ्चदश ॥ टीका। हो दशादेरिति ( II. 101) हः
तालवृन्ते ण्टः ॥६॥ तालवेंट ।। तालवृन्तम् ॥
वृश्चिके श्चः॥६॥ विंचुओ' ॥ वृश्चिकः ( I. 22 ; I. 32 ) ॥ टीका। उदितु-वृश्चिकयोरिति ( I. 22 ) उकारः ॥
Vr. III.44 RT.I.3.11 ME. III. 67
Ho. II.43 T.I.4.86
Vr. III. 46 RT.I.3.9
Vr. III. 41
HO.II. 16 T.I.4.18
____1) B. गुरुइ। 2) P omits this. 3) After this BP have वृक्षः शक्ख, and the order is रुक्मं रुप्प । 4) B reads as स्वस्ताभाम्रयोः। 5) P.नः ; पण्णासं । 6) Found in S only. 7) P. विश्च ओ।

Page #81

[II. 66
Vr. III. 61 RT.I.3.9
Vr. III.17 RT.I.3.7
Ho. II.95 T.I.4.25
Vr. III. 39 RT. I.3.12 Mk. III.46
Ho. II.71 T.I.4.62
संक्षिप्तसारे प्राकृताध्यायः • टोऽस्थ्नः ॥६६॥ अट्ठी । अस्थि ॥
शय्याभिमन्व्योजः ॥६॥ सेजा। अहिमज्जू ॥ शय्या । अभिमन्युः ॥ टीका। शय्यादेरेत् ( I. 4)
हा कार्षापणे ॥६॥ काहावणो ॥ कार्षापणः॥
विह्वले वा ॥६॥ विहलो विन्भलो वा॥
कुष्माण्ड्यां पूर्वस्य ॥७॥ कोहंडी ॥ कुष्माण्डी॥
लो [वा.] बाष्पे [हः] ॥७॥ [अल्ल आर्द्रम् ] * ॥ बाह बाष्पम् ॥
Vr. III.47 RT.I3.12 Mk. III.68
Ho. II.68 T.I.4.62
RT.I.3.16 Mk. III.46
Ho. II. 73 T1.4.68
Vr. III. 38 Hc. I0.70 Pu. III.13 T.I.4.61 RT. I. 8.16 Mk. II. 25,52
1) Found only in 8. 2) P. faecat fanget i 3) ABCC, 88, LP have लोमार्थे वाष्पे। L has corrected it as अलोमार्थे etc. [ corrige अलो-P.44 Ex.] ! But as the meaning of this sūtra is still unintelligible, the portions enclosed in the bracket have been emended by me on the strength of other grammarians. It can also be split up into two distinct sūtras—at ata, and also a: ; but as the whole is almost an emendation by me, it has been kept into one sūtra. 4) Not found in other manuscripts ; added by me. "
-

Page #82

२३
Vr. III. 28 Mk. III. 34
Ho. II. 26 T. I. 4.26-27
-II. 77]
हलकार्यम् ज्मः साध्वसे ॥७२॥ सज्झसं ॥ साध्वसम्॥ टीका। आदीदूतश्चेति ह्रस्वः1 (I. 14)॥
खः स्फोटके ॥७३॥ खोडओ ॥ स्फोटकः॥ स्तम्भ चादेः ।।७४॥
Vr. III. 16 Mk. III. 18
He. II. 6 T.I.4.6
Vr. III. 14 RT. I. 8.3 Mk. III. 17
HO.II. 8 T,I.4.11
Vr. III. 15
Hc. II. 7 T.I.4.9
Vr. III. 18
He. II
63-86 T. I. 4.67
63
RT.I.3.13 Mk. III.21
खंभो ॥ स्तम्भः ॥
स्थाणौ चाहरे ॥७॥ खाणू ॥ हरे तु नमह त्थाणु ॥ नमत स्थाणुं शिवमित्यर्थः ।।
रोर्यस्तुर्यादेः ॥७॥ तूरं तुर्यम् ।। धैर्य आश्चर्य पर्यन्त सौन्दर्य इत्यादि॥ [धीर। अच्छेर। पेरंत । सुदेर।]
टोका। ईद्धये सैन्धवे ह्रस्व इति ( I. 36) धीरमिति प्रयोगः । सौन्दर्यादेरुन्नित्यम् ( I. 43) इति ॥ . लः पर्यस्तादेः ॥७७॥
पल्लत्थो पर्यस्तः ॥ पर्याण पर्यत सौकुमार्य इत्यादि ॥ [पल्लाण। पल्लक । सोअमल्ल।]
टीका। मुकुटादेरुद् अत् ( I. 6 ) इति अकारः। सोअमल्ल इति ॥
Vr. III. 21 RT.1.8.14 Mk. III.24
Hc. II. 68 7.1.4.66
1) Found in S only. 2) S खोटओ। 3) S reads नमामि। 4) Found in 81 only. 5) Found in S only.

Page #83

संक्षिप्तसारे प्राकृताध्यायः
[ II. 78
Vr. III. 20 RT. I. 3. 13 Mk. III.22
रिअश्चौर्यादेः ॥७॥ चोरिअं। सोरिअ॥ चौर्यम् । शौर्यम् ॥ टीका। अत्र गणे आश्चर्यशब्दोऽप्यस्ति । तेन अच्छेरिअं इति च ॥
छोऽदयादेः क्षस्य ।।७।।। .
Vr. III.30 Pu, III.
T RT. I.3.6 Mk. III. 40
Ho. II. 11 .I.4.22
Vr. III. 31 Pu. III.8 Mk. III. 49
Hc. II. 18,
20 T.I. 4. 20-21
अच्छी अक्षि ॥ लक्ष्मी इक्षु क्षुधा चुत् क्षुण्ण क्षार क्षिप्त समक्ष तीर मतिका क्षेत्र कुक्षी इत्यादि । [ लच्छी । उच्छु । छुहा। छुआ। छुण्ण । छार । छित्त। समच्छ। छीर। मच्छिआ। छेत्त। कुच्छी।] आदिना दक्षः दच्छो॥
क्ष्मादेर्वा ॥८॥
खमा छमा वा ॥ खमेति केचित् ॥ वृक्ष वक्षः क्षण॥ [वच्छ रुक्ख । वच्छो वक्खो। छण खण।]
प्रतरितादेमः ॥१॥ पज्झरिओ | झीणो' ॥ प्रक्षरितः । क्षीणः ॥
स्तादेः त्यादिः ॥२॥ स्तादेः स्थाने स्थादिर्भवति ॥ कोत्युहो ॥ कौस्तुभः ॥
ष्टस्य दुः॥३॥ लट्ठी॥ यष्टिः॥ टीका। यष्टिः। लो यष्टेः ( II. 36 ) इति यस्य लः ॥
Pu. III.9
Mk.III.18
1) Found in S1 only. 2) P. अच्छि । 3) P adds this in the foot-note. 4) P. पञ्झरियो। 5) P. झीणो। 6) Found in S only.

Page #84

२५
Pu. III.4
Ac. II.2-3 T.I.4.4,8
Vr III. 29 Pu. III.6 RT.1.3.3 Mk III.37
Mk III. 20
-II. 90] . हल्कार्यम्
घ्य-ह्ययोमः ॥४॥ मझ । बझ॥ मध्यं मह्य वा। बाह्यम् ॥
ष्क-स्क-क्षाणां क्खः ॥८॥ विक्खंभो। मक्खरो। अक्खरं ॥ विष्कम्भः । मस्करः। अक्षरम् ॥
ज्जो र्यस्य ॥८६॥ कज्जं ॥ कार्यम्॥ टीका। कार्यमिति । आदीदूतश्चसंयुक्त ( I. 14 ) इति ह्रस्वः ।।
श्नादेर्हः ॥८॥ पण्हो। ष्ण। कण्हो। स्न। हाणं। क्षण । तिण्हं ॥ प्रश्नः। कृष्णः । स्नानम्। तीक्ष्णम् ॥
स्नुषा षकारः ॥८॥ सोहा णोहा ॥ स्नुषा ॥
थ्य-श्च-त्स-प्सानां च्छः ॥४॥ मिच्छा। पच्छिमो। कुच्छिओ। अच्छरो॥ मिथ्या। पश्चिमः । कुत्सितः। अप्सरः॥
Vr. III. 8,38 Pu. III. 11 RT. I. 3. 15
Ho. II.16 T.I.4
6 9-70
Vr. III. 27,40 Pu, III.2.14 Mk. III. 53
HO.II.21 T.I.4.23
Vr. III. 42 Mk, III.54
Ho. I. 114
II.22. T.I.2.61
नोत्सुकोत्सवयोः ॥१०॥ एतयोश्च न [ भवति ] ॥ ऊसुओ । ऊसवो ॥ उत्सुकः । उत्सवः ॥
1) P. दुर्मः । 2; S. गोहा। 3) Found only in S. 4) S. ओस्सुलो; P. ओसुश्रो।

Page #85

Pu. III.10 Mk. III. 43
संक्षिप्तसारे प्राकृताध्यायः
[ II. 91मादेहः ॥६॥ गिम्हो । स्म । विम्हिओ। म । पम्हो ॥ ग्रीष्मः । विस्मितः। पक्ष्मम् ॥
न्हो ह्रस्य ॥१२॥ कल्हारो ।। कहारः॥ टीका। अत्र उपान्त-मनयश्चेति ( II. 48 ) लकारलोप इति केचित् ।।
Vr. III.8
Ho. II.76 T.I.4.66
VE.III.8,32
HO.II.74 T.I.4.67.68
म्हो मस्य ॥१३॥ बम्हणो॥ ब्राह्मणः ॥
Mk. III. 62
Ho. II.67 T.I.4.61
ब्भो हस्य ॥१४॥ गन्भरो॥ गह्वरः॥
म्मो न्मस्य ॥६॥
Vr. III. 43 Pu. III. 15 Mk. III. 66
Hc. II.61 T.I.4.48
उम्मत्तो ॥ उन्मत्तः ॥
Vr.III.8,33
Ho. II.76 T. I.4.69
70
ण्हो ह्रस्य ॥६६॥ वण्ही ॥ वह्निः॥
ष्प-स्पयोः प्फः ॥१७॥
Vr.III.86-36 Pu. III. 12 Mk. III. 48
HO.II.53 T.I.4.44,76
पुप्फं। फंसो ॥ पुष्पम् । स्पर्शः॥
1) Found only in S1.

Page #86

Vr. III.37
Vr. II. 43 Mk. II.44
Hc.I. 260 TI. 3.87
-II. 104] .
हलकार्यम् । प्रतेः स्पस्य सिर्वा ॥८॥ पडिफद्दी पडिसिद्धी वा ॥ टीका। डादि प्रत्यादेरिति ( II. 25 ) तकारस्य डकार: ॥
ज्ञ-गणयोगः ॥१६॥ जण्णो । रुण्णो ॥ यज्ञः । रुग्णः ॥
शषयोः सः ॥१०॥ णिसा । विसं ॥ निशा । विषम् ॥
हो दशादेः ॥१०॥ दहो । पलाहो । पाहाणो॥ दश। पलाशः। पाषाणः ॥ टीका। दशपदेन दशान्ताः शब्दा गृह्यन्ते ॥
संज्ञायां वा दिवसस्य च ॥१०॥ दहबलो दसबलो वा। दिअहो दिअसो वा ॥ दशबलः। दिवसः ।।
णोऽयुग्मस्य ॥१०॥ विष्णजणो ॥ विज्ञजनः॥
आदौ वा ॥१०४॥ अकारयुक्तनस्य णः स्यात् ।। णई नई वा ॥ नदी॥
Vr.II.44.46 Mk.II.46
HD.I.262 T.I.3.88
Vr. II. 46 Mk. II. 47
He.I. 263 .I.3.88
Vr. II. 42 Ho. I. 228 Mk. II. 41-42 T.I. 8.62.
Mk. II 43
He. I. 229 T.I. 3.53.
1) The prescription of fer for ET of the word ofaegat as given in the example is not sanctioned by other grammarians. To this Vararuci has only one analogous sūtra fe 7 (III. 37) which is again doubtful, not being sanctioned by all Mss. consulted and collated by Cowell. 2) Found only in S1. 3) Found only in S.

Page #87

Vr. III.EO Pu. III. 20
Ho. II. 89 T.I.4.86
संक्षिप्तसारे प्राकृताध्यायः
[II. 105द्विरनादौ प्रागयुक्तोऽरादिः ॥१०॥ पूर्वप्रकृत्यवस्थायां युक्तोऽनादौ वर्तमानो वर्णो रादिवर्ज' द्विर्भवति ॥ जुग्गं। दिट्ठी॥ आदौ तु खंभो। खलि। अरादियुग् इति किम् । तूरं । जीहा। सीहो। माणं सिणी ॥ युग्मम् । दृष्टिः । स्तम्भः । स्खलितम् । तुर्यम्। जिह्वा। सिंहः। मनस्विनी॥ ____टीका। दृष्टिरिति । ऋष्यादेरित् (I. 32) इति इ: । ष्टस्य : (II. 83) इति द्वादेशे दिट्ठीति रूप भविष्यति । स्तम्भः । स्तम्भे चादेरिति (II. 74) स्तस्य स्थाने खः॥ यत्रानादिस्थस्य प्रागयुक्तस्य द्वित्वं न दृश्यते तदप्यस्य विषयः। अन्येऽपि संज्ञाशब्दाश्च । यथा षण्मुखः संमुहो निश्चलः णिच्छलो इत्यर्थः ॥
आपूर्वो ज्ञा ॥१०६॥ आणा। आणत्ती । आज्ञा । आज्ञप्तिः॥ नभश्वर-हरिश्चन्द्रोरश्चरादौ निपातः ॥१०७॥ RT.1.5.10 HO, II. ST णहअरो। हरिदो । उरअरो॥ नभश्चरः। हरिश्चन्द्रः। उरश्चरः ॥
Mk. III.74
Mk. III. 10 T. 1. 4.76
द्विींडाद्य पान्तो यौवन-वश्च ॥१०॥
Ho. II. 98 T. I.4.93.
Vr. III. 52 Pu. III. 21 RT. I. 4.1 Mk. III.71
गेड्ड। जोव्वणं ॥ स्रोतस् व्याहृत ऋजु जानु युवन् स्थूल प्रेम चलित ॥ [ सोत्त। वाहत्त । रिज्जु । जण्णु। जुव्वण । सुल्ल। पेम्म । चलित्त ॥]
Vr. III. 68 Ho. II. 99 सेवादेर्वा ॥१०॥
T.I.4.92
Pu. III. 22 RI. I.4. I-2 Mk. III.76
सेवा सेवा वा ॥ देव नख एक शिव तैल भ्रूण हेम निहित मण्डूक तूष्णीक ॥ [ दइव दइव्व । णह णक्ख । एअ एक। सिअ सिव्व । तेल तेल्ल । भूण भुण्ण । हेम हेम्म । णिहिअ णिहित्त । मंडुअ मंडुक । तुण्हिअ तुहिक । ]
1) Found in S only. 2) Found in S1 only. 3) P.-श्चन्द्रोरस्तटादौ । 4) SP. हरिअण्णो, and after this P has उरअरो and ss. have उरअठो।

Page #88

-II. 113]
हल्कार्यम्
दुःसह-दुःसंचर- दुःखितानां संधौ ॥ ११० ॥
दुस्सहो दूसहो वा । दुरसंचरो 1 दूसंचरो वा । दुखिओ दूहिओ वा ॥ दुःसहः। दुःसंचरः । दुःखितः ॥
२६
दुर्लभादेर्युक्तस्य ।।१११||
दुलहो दूलहो । दुर्भग त्रैलोक्य [ अश्व ] कर्णिकार दीर्घरात्र [ पुष्य ] अश्रु, ईश्वर [ श्वश्रू 4 ] [ मिश्र ' ] विश्वास रश्मि इत्यादि ॥ [ दूहग दुब्भअ । तेलोअ तेल्लोक | आस अस्स । काणिआर कण्णिआर । दीहरत्त दिग्घरत । पूस पुस । अंसु अस्सु । ईसर इस्सर । सासू सस्सू । मीस मिस्स । वीसास विस्सास । रासि रस्सि । ]
तत्पुरुषादावयुक्तश्चोत्तरपदादिः ||११३ ||
बहुलं बहुफलं वा बहुफलम् ॥
टीका । खादि (II. 11 ) इति ह: '
8 ।
7
टीका । अश्राविति । अश्वादेरादिमध्यगुर्वक्षरपर इति (II.119 ) अनुस्वारः ॥
Hc. II. 72
T. I. 4. 63.

ef. Ho. I. 43
T. I. 2. 8
समासे वा ||११२ ||
देवथुई देवत्थुई वा ॥ देवस्तुतिः ॥
टीका | देवस्तुतिरिति । स्तादेः त्थादिरिति ( II. 82 ) स्तकारस्य स्थाने त्थकारः ॥ स्तादेः त्थादिरिति त्थादेशेनापि यन्नित्यं तदपि विकल्पेनात्र भवतीति वचनार्थं पुनर्वापदमत्रोपन्यस्तम् ॥

Pu. IV. 11
Vr. III 57. He. II. 97. Pu. IV. 10. T. I. 4. 90-91. III. 28
All have अध्वन् ।
1) P. दूसञ्चरो दुस्सञ्चरो etc. 2 ) Emended by me. All have पुष्प | 4) Emended by me. All have 3) Emended by me. शत्रु | 5 ) Emended by me. All have मित्र | 6) After this all the Mss. and Pin the foot-note read "व्यवस्थित विभाषया सत्तू इति नित्यम्", 7 ) Found in S only 8 ) Found in S1 only.

Page #89

संक्षिप्तसारे प्राकृताध्यायः
[ II. 114
दाढादिर्दष्ट्रादेः ॥११४॥
Vr.IV.36 Pu.IV.84 RTI.524 Mk, IV.64
of.HD.II.117 123,199,174
Vr. IV. 32 Ho II. 144 Mk. IV.61T. I. 8.96
Vr. IV.28 RT.I.6.9 Mk. IV.65
He.II.116 T.I.4.113
Vr.IV.31,38 RT. I. 6.9 of.Mk.IV.64
of.Hc.1I
138 II, 178
दंष्ट्रादेः स्थाने दाढादिर्भवति ॥ दंष्ट्रादाढा। दुहिता धूआ। भ्रः भूमआ। वैदूर्यम् वेरूलीयं। ललाटम् णडालं । उभयम् अड्डह। पार्श्वम् पासं। बृहत् बाहु। स्तम्बः लंबो। चिह्नम् चिणं। वधः वद्धो। कबन्धः कबद्धो। बृहस्पतिः भअप्फई। आलानम् आणालं। भस्म छार। गृहम् घर॥
न गृहपतौ ॥११॥ गहवई ॥ गृहपतिः॥
करणो रणोर्व्यत्ययः स्त्रियाम् ॥११६॥ कणेरू ॥ करेणुः॥
गोणादिर्वा गोदावर्यादेः ॥११७॥ गोआवरी गोणा वा ॥ निलयः णिहेलणो। उत्पलम् फल्लोटू। चूतः माअंदो। शुक्तिः सिप्पी । पीतम् पीअणं । विद्युत् विजुणा। • मलिनम् मइल। सुवर्णम् सुपण्णं। अवकाशः ओआसो। अपसारः ओसारो॥
ङनाहन्यनुस्वारः ॥१८॥ हलि परे ङनोः स्थानेऽनुस्वारो भवति ॥ पंती। मंती । पङक्तिः । मन्त्री ॥
अश्रादेरादिमध्य-गुर्वक्षरपरः ॥१२॥ Vr. IV. 15_Ho. 1. 26 अंसू अश्नु ॥ वक्रः वंको ॥ श्मशू स्पर्श मनस्विनी शुष्क दर्शन इत्यादि। [मंसू। फंस। माणंसिणी। सुह। दंसण।] 1) BCCIP. कुणे रु, SS, कणे। 2) P. फल्लोढ़। :) P. शिप्सी,
Vr. IV. 17 RT.I.6.15T Mk. IV.23
Ho I. 80 .I.1.47
रा
Vr. IV.15 Mk. IV. 20
Ho. 1.26 Vr.I.1.42

Page #90

३१
Vr. IV. 6
Ho.1.11
Mk: IV. 13
-II. 125]
हलकार्यम् लुगन्तो हल ॥१२०॥
Pu. IV. 12 . I. I. 26 अन्तो हल लुम् भवति ॥ मरू। अच्छरअणो ॥ मरुत् । अप्सरोगणः ।।
टीका। अप्सरोगणः । ओकारस्य अकारः प्रकृतित्वात् ओकारोऽत्रलुप्तः । एवमन्यदपि बोध्यम् ॥
Ho. I.13-14 T. I.1.26
RT.I.5.4
न निर्दुरोरति ॥१२॥ निरासो। दुरासो॥
पुनरो नोक्ते ॥१२२॥ पुणरुत्त॥ कचिद्वाधिः ॥ पुणोवि पुणवि पुणरवि वा।
टोका। मनःशिलादौ स ओद्वा ( II. 146) इति रेफस्य स्थाने ओकारः। विसर्गविधौ सकार-रेफयोरैक्यात् ॥
मांसादेरनुस्खारो वा ॥१२३॥ - मंसं मांसं वा। कह कह वा॥ नूनं किंपुनः इदानी सम्मुख इत्यादि । [णण णूणं । किउण किंउणो। दाणी इदाणीं। समुह संमुह।]
स्त्रियामात् ॥१२४।। स्त्रीलिङ्गेऽन्तो हल आकारो भवति। सरिआ ॥ सरित् । न विद्युतः ॥१२॥
IV... Ho. 1. 15 विज्जू । विद्युत् ॥ टीका। विद्युदित्यस्य स्थाने द्यस्य ज्ज ( II. 18 ) इति ज्जः ।।
Vr.IV.16 Pu. III. 25 RT.I.5.15 Mk. IV.25
HO.I.29 T.I.1.14
Vr. IV.7,9 Ho. I.15 ME. IV. 14T.I.1.29
Vr. IV.9 Mk. IV. 14
He. I. 16
____1) Found in St only. 2) In P it is given as a separate sātra (no. 126). 3) Found in 8 only.

Page #91

संक्षिप्तसारे प्राकृताध्यायः
[II. 126
Vr. IV.10-11 HO.I.18-19 Pu. IV.16 T.I.1.85-86 RT. I 5.12 Mr. IV.27
समास-पुंलिङ्गयोरकारः ॥१२६।। वाअक। सुवाओ । वाचाकृतम् । सुवाक् ॥
दिक-शरत्-प्रावृषोऽदन्ताश्च ॥१२७॥ दिसो। सरदो। पाउसो॥
टीका। पाउस । पाउस इति प्रकृते पुसि प्रावट-शरन्नसन्ताः ( II. 129) इति पुस्त्वम् । लुगन्तो हल् ( II. 120 ) इति लोपः। अता सोरिति ( III. 2 ) ओत्वम् ॥ __ पृष्ठादिर्वा ॥१२॥
Mk. IV. 29 पृष्ठादिः स्त्रियां वा भवति ।। पुटु पुट्ठी ॥ अक्षि प्रश्न ॥ [ अच्छी अच्छि। पण्हा पण्हो।] टीका। पुट्टमिति । उदृत्वादेश्व' ( I. 30 )॥
पुंसि प्रावृट-शरनसन्ताः ॥१२६॥ प्रावृट -शरन्-नकार-सकारान्ताश्च पुसि भवन्ति ॥ पाउसो। सरदो। कम्मो। जसो॥ प्रावृट् । शरत् । कर्म । यशः॥ टीका। नान्तं नपुंसकं विद्धि पुलिङ्गेऽपि प्रचक्षते ।
एवं लिङ्गे विपर्यासो शेयः शब्दान्तरेष्वपि ॥ न शिरो-नमसी ॥१३०॥
Vr. IV.18 Pu. IV. 18 RT. I. 5.18 Mk. IV.27
Hc. I. 31 . I.1.60
Vr.IV.18-19 Pu. IV.18 Mk. IV.27
Ro. I. 32 T.I.1.49
सिर । णह॥
1) Found in S, only. 2) Found in S only. 3) ABCC, SS.Pशरद्वसन्ताः । But it should be corrected as न, which we find in the vrtti, 4) S. सिरिं।

Page #92

II. 136]
हल कार्यम्
Hc. II.146 T. II.1.29
Vr.IV.23 Pu. IV 23 RT.I.6.22 Mk. IV.39
Ho. III. 180 T. II. 4.41
क्लादेस्तूणडादिः ॥१३॥ होऊण । गंतूण ॥ भूत्वा। गत्वा ॥
न्तङ शतुः ॥१३२॥ होतो ॥ भवन् ॥
टीका। ङित्वाद्वर्गपञ्चमलोपाभावः। धातुमतोऽम इति मस्य नः। ङनोहल्यनुस्वारः ( II. 118 ) इत्यस्यानुस्खारः ।
शानस्य वा ॥१३३॥
Vr.VII.10
Ho. III.181 T. II.4.42
वेवंतो वेवमाणो वा ॥ वेपमानः ॥
Vr. IV. 24
Ho. II. 145 T. II.1.28
तृरिरः ॥१३४॥ गमिरो॥ गन्ता ॥
ता-त्वयोर्दा-तूणौ ॥१३॥ मूढदा। मूढतूणं ॥ मूढ़ता मूढत्वं वा ।। मतोरिल्लादिः ॥१३६॥
Pu. IV.28
Ho.II. 169 . II. 1.1
Vr. IV. 26 Pu. IV.30 T RT. I. 5.21 Mk. IV.46-47
धणइल्लो। णिहालू । निद्दाला। उवहारुल्लं' । पुण्णवंतो। रोसइल्लो ॥ धनवान्। निद्रालुः निद्रावान् वा। निद्रावती। उपहारवत् । पुण्यवान् । रोषवान् ॥
1) Found in S1 only. 2) ABCCIP तुण । 3): P.-रुग्णं | 4) P.-इत्तो।

Page #93

३४
संक्षिप्तसारे प्राकृताध्यायः
संधि प्राप्तः || १३७॥
नित्यप्राप्तोऽपि संधिर्वा भवति ॥ ब्रासइसी वासेसी वा । कुसअग्गी कुसग्गी वा ॥ देवं इमं देवमिमं वा । तिइअ तीअ वा ॥ व्यासऋषिः । कुशाग्निः । देवमिमम् । तृतीयम् ॥ कचिन्न स्यादेव । वालाए ॥ वालायाः ॥ दीर्घो वा सुभगादेः ॥१३८।।
सुहओ सूहवो वा । विसं वीसं क्वचिन्नित्यम् * ॥ सालीवणं । पीलूवणं ॥
Ho. I. 43.
आद्-ईद्-ऊल - लुप्तव्यञ्जने ॥ १३६||
T. I. 2. 8.
6
आसासो | वीसासो । ऊसवो ॥ आश्वासः । विश्वासः । उत्सवः ॥
टीका । लुप्त व्यञ्जनं यस्य तल्ल प्तव्यञ्जनम् ।
आश्वासशब्दस्याद्य पान्तलवरः
( II. 47 ) इति वकारलुक् 1 आदीदूतश्च संयुक्ते ( I. 14 ) इति ह्रस्वे कृते
पुनर्दीर्घः ॥ 8
दुर्लभादावदुःखितेऽद्वित्वे वा ॥१४०॥
दूलहो || दुःखिते तु दुहिओ ॥ द्वित्वे तु दुल्लहो दुक्खओ ॥
9
विंशत्यादौ ङादिलुक
वसई 11 टीका | स्त्रियामात् ( II. स्वारो गृह्यते । प्रकृते ऽनुस्वारस्थानीयत्वात् 14 ॥
वा ॥ वेणुवणं वेणूवणं वा ॥
10

॥ १४१ ॥
[ II. 137
I तीसा 12 11 विंशतिः 1 त्रिंशत् ॥
Vr. I. 17
RT. I. 5. 14 Mk. IV. 5

Ho. I. 92
124 ) इति तकारस्य आकार: 13 ॥ ङ-पदेनात्रानु
& separate सूत्र (No 142 ). a separate sūtra ( No. 144 )
(1) P. कुसाग्गी । 2) In P this is given as 3) ABCC 1 P. सूहओ वा । 4 ) In P it is given as 5) P reads अद् इद् उल् eto. 6) P. आसो । 7 ) Found in S1 only. 8) Found in S only. 9) P. दुलहो दूलहो वा 10) P reads मा दिलुक् । 11 ) B. वीसह 12) P. तीसा | 13) Found in S only. 14 ) Found in S1 only.

Page #94

Mk. IV.6
Ho. I. 186 T.I. 8.1
Mk.IV.9
-II. 146]
हल कार्यम् स्वस्त्यादेव ओद्वा ॥१४२॥ सत्थि सोत्थि वा ॥ सणं सोण्णं वा॥ णअहलिअॅणोहलि वा ॥ स्वस्ति। स्वज्ञम् । नवफलिकम् ॥ कचिद् ह्रस्वो वा ॥ णइसोत्तो णईसोत्तो वा ॥ नदीस्रोतः॥
तेस्त्रयसः ॥१४३॥ तेरह । तेवीसं ॥ त्रयोदश । त्रयोविंशत् ॥
लुग वा वादेर्यावदादौ ॥१४४॥ Mk. IV. 9 जा जाव वा। ता ताव वा। भाणं भाअणं वा। जी जीविक्ष वा। मूलप्पाडी मूलोप्पाडी वा। चक्काओ चक्कवाओ वा। केणवि केणावि वा । इत्यादि ॥ यावत्। तावत्। भाजनम्। जीवितम्। मूलोत्पाटी। चक्रवाकः। केनापि ॥
उदुम्बरे दोनित्यम् ॥१४॥ उंबरो॥ उदुम्बरः ।।
मनःशिलादौ स ओद्वा ॥१४६॥ मणसिला मणोसिला वा। मणरहो मणोरहो वा। सररह सरोरुहं वा । पुणपुणो पुणोपुणो वा इत्यादि ।
- [इति हल्-कार्य निवृत्तम् ॥
RP. I.5.11 Mr. IV.7
1) In P this is given as a separate sutra (No. 149). 2) P. तेरोसं, 3) P. gratare: etc. 4) After this P has gurgurt gortgot an 5) Not found in ABCCISSIP.

Page #95

स्वादेरोदादिः ||१||
सुप्रभृतेः स्थाने ओद् आदिर्भवति ।।
अता सोरोत् ||२||
एसो एस वा ॥
एणष्टा ||४||
वच्छो ॥ वृक्षः ॥
टीका । वृक्ष इत्यस्य स्थाने क्ष्मादेवेंति (II. 80 ) चकारस्य छकार: 1 ||
एतदो वा ||३||
Vr. VI. 19. RT. I 6.3 Mk. V. 2
तृतीयः परिच्छेदः
सुबन्त-कार्यम्
एषः ॥
जस-ड
[- डस्योरादता शस एत् ||६||
वच्छा वच्छे ॥ वृक्षाः वृक्षाद्वा वृक्षान् ॥

Vr. V. 1. Pu. V. 8 RT. 1.6. 2 Mk. V. 1
1) This tikā is found in S only. 2) margin of AC 1. 3) Found in S only. 4) AC 1. 5 ) 8 – देता ।
Vr. V. 4 Pu.V. 12 Mk. V. 5
2
वृक्षेण ॥
अता इत्यनुवर्तते । रुक्खेण ॥ टीका | वृक्षस्य सस्वरो रुर्वा ( II. 45 ) इति वृस्थाने रुः । ष्क- स्क- क्षाणां बखः (II. 85) ।।±
बहुवचनवत् सर्वत्रैव द्विवचनम् ॥५॥
4
एतेन जस्-सादीनां यथारुप तथा औ- औतादीनामपि ॥
Vr. V. 2 Pu.V.1 Mk. V. 3
Hc. III. 2
T. II. 2. 13
Vr V. 2 Pu. V. 10.11 Mk. V. 3
Ho. III. 3 T. II, 2.14

Hc. III. 6
T. II. 2. 18,4
Ho. III. 4
T. II. 2. 3
Ec. III. 4
T. II. 2.3
This vrtti is found in the Found in the margin of

Page #96

-III. 13 ]
सुबन्त कार्यम्
भिसोहिं अत एच्च ॥७॥
वच्छेहिं । मालाहिं ॥ वृक्षैः । मालाभिः ॥
ङसेद-दु-हयः प्राग्दीर्घश्च ॥८॥
वच्छादो । अग्गीदु अग्गीहि वा ॥ वृक्षतः । अग्नेः । अग्नितः ॥
1
Vr. V. 5 Pu. V. 4.9 RT. I. 6. 3 Mk. V. 6
Vr. V. 6, 13 Pu. V. 6
Mk. V.7
सर्वनाम्नां न दीर्घो दो - पराणाम् ||६||
तदो । जदो । सव्वदो ॥ ततः तस्माद् वा । यतः यस्माद् वा । सर्वतः
सर्वस्माद्वा ॥
विप्पस धणं ॥ विप्रस्य धनम् ॥
आमो णः प्राग्दीर्घश्च ॥१३॥
वच्छाण । अग्गीण ॥ वृक्षाणाम् । अग्नीनाम् ॥

पुरतोऽग्रतः प्रभृतेश्च ॥ १०॥
पुरो । अग्गदो । पुट्ठदो ॥ पुरतः । अग्रतः ।
भ्यसो हिंतो सुंतो अत 'एदाती च ॥ ११ ॥
वच्छेहिंतो वच्छासु'तो' । साहुहिंतो साहुसुतो* ॥ वृक्षाभ्यां वृक्षेभ्यो वा । साधुभ्यां साधुभ्यो वा ॥
पृष्ठतः ॥
टीका । बहुवचनवदिति (III. 5) वचनात् वृक्षाभ्यां वृक्षेभ्यो वा ॥
Vr. V. 8
ङसः स्सः ॥१२॥
Pu. V. 14 Mk. V. 9
३७
Ho. III. 7 T. II. 2. 6
Hc. III. 8
T. II. 2. 6.
18
Vr. V. 4
Mk. V.5

Vr. V. 7 Ho. III. 9. RT. I. 6.3
Mk. V. 8. T. II. 2 6-7.
Hc.I II. 10 T. II. 2. 10
1) S. इत् । 2) S1. सुन्तो । 3) S. सुन्तो । 4) Found in S1 only.
Hc. III. 6 T. II. 2.18,4

Page #97

Vr. VI.64 Pu. V.2
Hc. III. 131 T.II. 3.36
Vr. v. RT. I. 6.4 Mk. V.10
Ho. III. 11 T.II. 2.11,16
Vr.v.14 Ho.III.18,22,23 Pu.V.16,19T. II. 2.3,26-27 Mk. V.17
संक्षिप्तसारे प्राकृताध्यायः
[III. 14सर्वत्र षष्ठीवच्चतुर्थ्याः ॥१४॥ विप्पस्स देहि ॥ विप्राय देहि ॥
डेमिः ॥१५॥ वच्छम्मि। अग्गिम्मि॥ वृक्षे। अग्नौ ॥ अतद्वा ॥१६॥
Pu. V. 14-15 वच्छम्मि वच्छे इमे वा॥ वृक्षे अस्मिन् ॥
इणः शस-ङसोर्णोः ॥१७॥ इण उत्तरयोः शस्-ङसोः स्थाने णोर्भवति ॥ अग्गिणो। साहुणो॥ अग्नीन् अग्नेर्वा । साधून साधोर्वा ॥ ङसः स्सश्च ॥१८॥
Pu. V. 21 इण उत्तरस्य ङसः स्सः स्यात् ॥ अग्गिस्स । साहुस्स ॥ अग्नेः । साधोः ॥
जस ओरोरिणश्चात् ॥१६॥ इण उत्तरस्य जसः स्थाने ओर्भवति । इण उत्तरस्य जसः स्थाने रोर्वा* भवति । इणः स्थानेऽच्च । अग्गओ अग्गरो वा। साहुओ साहुरो वा ॥
णोर्वा ॥२०॥ अग्गिणों। साहुणो॥ अग्नयः। साधवः ॥
जसोलुग्वासोनित्यं भिस-सुपोरपिदीर्घश्च॥२२॥ P::V..18 - अग्गी अच्छति अच्छइ वा। अग्गीहिं। साहुसु ॥ अग्नयः सन्ति अग्निरस्ति वा। अग्निभिः। साधुषु ॥
Pu. v. 11
Vr, V. 16 (Comm) Pu.V. 17
Vr.v. 18 Pu, V. 16
1) S and S, omit वत्। 2) Not tound in S and P. 3) This vrtti is found in the margin of S. 4) S. रो वा ; S1 रोर्वा ।
4

Page #98

Pu.V,20
Vr.v.2
Vr. V. 21 Pu. V. 38,47
-III. 28 ]
सुबन्त-कार्यम् अग्निवत् सख्यादिष्टादौ ॥२२॥ सहिणा। पइणा ॥ सख्या। पत्या ॥ टीका। अत्र संस्कृतवच्छेष इति संस्कृतातिदेशात् टा स्थाने णा ॥
स्त्रियादोत् शसश्च ॥२३॥ Vr. V. 19 स्त्रीलिङ्गे जसः स्थाने शसश्च स्थाने उद् भवति। ओञ्च ॥ मालाउ मालाओ। णईट गईओn मालाः। नद्यो नदीः॥
जसो लुग्वा ॥२४॥ वहू अच्छति ॥ वध्वः सन्ति ॥
ह्रस्वोऽमि ॥२॥ अमि परे स्त्रियां दी? ह्रस्वो भवति । मालं । वहु॥ मालाम् । वधूम् ॥
टा-ङस-डीनामिदेददातः ॥२६॥ Pr: V. 29.42 स्त्रियां टा-ङस्-डीनां स्थाने इद् एद् अद् आद् इत्येते आदेशा भवन्ति । गईइ कणईए णईअ णईआ वा॥ ङस्-ड्योरप्येवम् ॥ नद्या कृतम् ॥ टीका। समसंख्यत्वाभावात् क्रमोऽत्र नेष्टः ।।
आदन्ताददिदेतः ॥२७॥ मालाअ । मालाइ। मालाए॥ टीका। क्रमोऽत्रेष्टः समसंख्यत्वात् ॥
शेरिं प्रागदीर्घश्च ॥२८॥ नपुंसके जस्-शसादेशस्य शेः स्थाने इ. भवति । प्रागदीर्घश्च । धणाई। जसाई। दहीइ । प्रागनुस्वारो वेत्येके । धणांइ। वणांई ॥
Vr. v. 20 Pu.V. 41.42
Vr. v. 28
Vr. V. 26 Pu. v.37
1) P. पहिणा। 2) This tika is found in Sr only. 3) This स्थाने is found only in S. 4) This tikā is found in S1 only. 5) S1 omits . प्राग्दीर्घश्च, and adds it in the vrtti ; but s omits प्राग्दीर्घश्च in the vrtti. 6) SS1 शसोः । 7) S omits this example.

Page #99

Vr. v. 30 Pu.V.36
H. III. 25 T. II. 2.30
Vr. V.31 He. III. 45 Pu. V. 24T. II.2.49 Mk. V.88
Vr. v. 34 Hc. III. 47 Pu. V. 25-26 T. II. 2.51 Ik. V.39
Vr.v.35 Pu. V.26
संक्षिप्तसारे प्राकृताध्यायः
[ III. 29स्वमोऽनुस्वारः ॥२६॥ दहिं । महुं॥ दधि । मधु ॥
ऋदारः स्वादौ ॥३०॥ स्वादौ परे ऋद् आरो भवति । भत्तारो। कत्तारो॥ भर्ता । कर्ता ॥
पित्रादेररः ॥३१॥ पिअर । पिअरेण ॥ पितरम्। पित्रा।
आ वा सौ ॥३२॥ पिअरो पिआ वा॥ पिता॥
मातुः स्वादौ नित्यम् ॥३३॥ माआ। मा। माआइ ॥ माता। मातरम् । मात्रा॥
जस-शस्-टा-ङस्भिरूद्वा ॥३४॥ भत्तू अच्छति। भत्तू रक्खह। भत्तू क। भत्तू धणं ॥ भर्तारः सन्ति । भर्तृन रक्षत । भर्ना कृतम् । भतु धनम् ।।
टीका। भर्त-शब्दस्य ऋकारस्य स्थाने आरे कृते पश्चाद् अदन्तत्वाद् अता सोरिति ( III. 2)1॥
राज्ञो वा जसामोर्णोण प्राग-दीर्घश्च ॥३॥ Fr: V. 38-THEIL2. 38-33 राज्ञ उत्तरयो सामोः स्थाने यथाक्रम णोणं इत्येतो वा भवतः। प्रागदीर्घश्च ॥ राआ राआणो वा। राआण राआणं वा। राजानः। राजानम् । सौ च दीर्घः ॥३६॥
Vr. III. 36
Vr. V.32 Pu. V. 34 Mk.V. 42
Ho. III.46 T. II. 2.50
Vr. V. 33 Pu.V.27
Vr.v.36-37 He. III. 49-50 u.V.33 ' T.II.2.53-55
राआ॥ राजा॥
1) This tika is found in S1 only. 2) S and S1 omit प्राग | 3) Si has further च after दीर्घः।

Page #100

Pu. v.35
Vr. V. 41 Pu. V.34 Mk. V. 46
-III. 42] .
सुबन्त-कार्यम् संबुद्धावनुस्वारो वा ॥३७॥ हे राआ हे रामवा। णं वान्यतोऽपीत्येके। वल्लरीणं मुहं वल्लरीणां मुहं ॥ वल्लरीणां मुखम् ॥
शस्-ङसि-ङसामदिच्च ॥३८॥ Pu. V. 35 राज्ञः शस-ङसि-डसां स्थाने णोर्भवति। अकारश्चेद्वा ॥ राइणो पेक्ख । राइणो गेण्हदि। राइणो धणं ॥ राज्ञः प्रेक्षस्व। राज्ञो गृह्णाति। राज्ञो धनम् ॥ पक्षान्तरेऽल्लुक द्विर्णोश्च वा ॥ राइणो राअणो रण्णो वा ॥
टा णा ण्णा वा ।।३।। राणा राइणा वा। रण्णा राइण्णा वा ।। राज्ञा ॥
आत्मादेरप्पणादिश्च ॥४०॥ आत्मन्-ब्रह्मन्-युवनशब्दानां स्थाने अप्पण: बम्हण जुव्वणा वा भवन्ति । अप्पणो' अप्पणेण। पक्षान्तरे इद् द्वित्वाल्लुगवर्ज राजवत् । अप्पा । अप्पणा। अप्पणो धणं । आमि' । अप्पणो अप्पाणं ॥ आत्मा। आत्मना। आत्मनः धनम् । आत्मानम् ॥
.: स्सिं-स्सि-त्थाः सर्वनाम्नः ॥४१॥ Pu. V. 61 सर्वनाम्नो कीत्यस्य स्थाने स्सिं स्सि त्था भवन्ति। तसि तस्सि तत्थ ॥ तस्मिन॥ हिं वा किं-यत्-तदाम् ॥४२॥
Pu. v. 55 किं-यत्-तदा ङीत्यस्य स्थाने हिं वा भवति । कहिं कस्सिं । जहिं 10 जस्सिं। तहिं तस्सिं ॥ कस्मिन् । यस्मिन् । तस्मिन् ।।
Vr. V.45 Pu.V.32 ME V.53
1) This sūtra and its výtti with examples are not found in 'S and 81. 2) In P it is given as a separate sutra (No.39). 3) Not found in P. 4) P has राइण्णा रण्णा वा। 5) S reads-राप्पणादिश्च । 6) S. आप्पाण | '7) S. आप्पणो। 8) S omits इद् । 9) S omits from आमि to अप्पाणं 10) s omits from जहिं to तस्मिन् ।

Page #101

४२
संक्षिप्तसारे प्राकृताध्यायः
[III. 43
Vr. VI.8 Pu.v.56 RPI. 6.16 Mk. V.62
vr. VI.6 RP. I. 6. 16 Mk. V.60
Hc. III. 64 P. II. 2.68
Pu.v.56 Mk. V.62
आहे' हिआ च काले ॥४३॥ काहे कहिआ वा । कहिं कस्सिं च ॥ कदा कस्मिन् काले ॥
स्त्रियामीच उसः स्सा से ।।४।। स्त्रीलिङ्गे कि-यत्तदां ङसः स्थाने स्सा से इत्येतौ भवतः । अदीच्च ।।
आ च [दार्थे"] ॥४॥ किस्सा कीसे । पक्षान्तरे कीइ. कीए कीअ कीआ॥ कस्याः॥
टीका । किस्सा इत्यत्र आदीदूतश्च संयुक्ते ( I. 14 ) ह्रस्वः । कोआ। एतनियमार्थ टा-ङस् -ङीनामिदेददातः (III. 26 ) इत्यनेन सामान्ये प्राप्ते आद्य व विधीयते [ दार्थे ) गम्ये तेनातिवेलायाः कस्या इत्यर्थे कीआ ॥
अस्त्रियामासो वा ॥४६॥ करस कासो वा॥
तदो ङसा त्रिषु वा से ॥४७॥ तिस्सा तस्स। से वा ॥ तस्याः तस्य ।
त्तो दो उसेश्च ॥४॥ किं-यत्तदा डसे स्थाने तो दो इत्येतौ भवतः । कत्तो कदो।
Pu.v.67
Pu. v.61, 68
1) P reads अहे etc. 2) ABCCI SS1 P. दाढ्य । The word दाढ्य', it seems to us, is a corrupt form of crů, and hence it has been emended by me as दार्थे which also goes at par with the previous sutra आहे हिआ च काले (III. 43). Here दार्थे stands for कालार्थ suffix दा+अर्थ. It is to be noted that the tīkā has not even explained the word ; on the contrary, it has stated only दाढ्य गम्ये etc. Hence the tika has also been emended. 3) Ms. has दाढ्य ; emended by me. 4) This tika is found in S only.

Page #102

सुबन्त-कार्यम्
तच्छब्दस्य दो तो ' वा ॥ ४६ ॥
तत्तो तो तदत्तो वा ॥
-III. 54 ]
एतदस्तो- दो-दु-हयः ॥ ५० ॥ तो- दो-त्थेषु तलोपश्च ॥ ५१ ॥
3
तो दो एदादु एदाहि एत्थ । एतस्मात् । एतस्मिन् ॥
टीका । एत्थ । ङः स्सिंस्सित्थाः (III. 41 ) इति त्थ: 4 ||
इदमेतदोष्टमोरणा एसिं || ५२ ||
5
5
इदमेतदोः किं यत्तदां च टा आम् इत्येतयोः स्थाने इणा एसि इत्येतौ वा भवतः । इमेण इमिणा इमेसिं वा । एदेण एदिणा एदेसिं वा । केण किणा केसिं" वा । इमाण इमिणा इमेसि वा । एदाण एदिणा एदेसिं वा । काण किणा सिं वा ॥ अनेन । एतेन । केन । एषाम् । एतेषाम् । केषाम् ॥
इदमादेरन्लुक् च ॥५३॥
दो दाहि इमा ॥
6
Pu. V. 70
टीका । आमोणः प्रागदीर्घश्च (III. 13 ) इत्यामः स्थाने णः पूर्वस्य दीर्घः । इमाण । एते यथाक्रमेण टा स्थाने इण आमः स्थाने एसिं । इदमादेरल्लुक् च
(III. 53 ) इत्यकारः ॥
Vr. III. 14-15 Pu. V. 67

४३
Pu V. 69
इदम इमः || ५४ ॥
स्वादौ परे इदमः स्थाने इमो भवति । इमे अच्छइ || अस्मिन्नस्ति ॥

Hc. III. 72
Vr. VI. 14 Pu. V. 64
RT. I. 6. 18 T. II. 2. 76 Mk. V. 70
1) Phas भोः । 2 ) P has तदओ | 3) In P this (no. 51 ) is included in the above sutra 4) Found only in S. 5) S omits this. 6) In P these examples are given as if forming one separate sutra (no. 54). In एदो P has एतद ।

Page #103

४४
संक्षिप्तसारे प्राकृताध्यायः
[ III. 55
Vr. VI. 16
He. III. 74 T. II. 2.78
Vr. VI. 18 Pu.V.67,71
Ho. III. 90
स्स-स्सिमोरद्वा ॥५॥ अस्स इमस्स वा। अस्सि इमरिस वा ॥
स्वम्भ्यामिणमादि क्लीवे ॥६॥ इणं धणं । इणमो इम वा ॥ त्थ-प्रयोगाभावः ॥ इदम् ॥
अदसो दो मुः सुना अहो वा ॥५॥ Vr. V.. 23-24. स्वादौ परे अदसो दकारो मुर्भवति । सुणा सह अहो वा॥ अमू अच्छइ अहो वा। अमुणो अमूहि ॥ असौ। अमी। अमीभिः ।।
युष्मदस्मदोस्तं-हमादी ॥५॥ संस्कृतानुसारात् सुपा सह युष्मदस्मदोः स्थाने तं-हमादी भवतः ।। युष्मदस्तं-तुमं सुना ॥ ॥५॥
T. II, 3.1 तं होसि तुमं वा॥
तु चामा ॥६॥ तुपुच्छामि तं तुमं वा ॥ त्वां पृच्छामि ।। तुज्झे तुम्हे जसा ॥६१॥
T. II. 3.3 तुज्मे भणह तुम्हे वा ॥ यूयं भणथ ॥
शसा वोरच ॥२॥ पुच्छामि वो तुझे तुम्हे वा ॥ युष्मान् पृच्छामि ॥ टा-डिभ्यां तइ तए तुमए डिना तुमम्मि च ॥३॥
Vr. VI. 80-38 Ho. III 94
ME. V. 86,94 T. II. 3.6 तइ क। तइ ठितुमम्मि वा ॥ त्वया कृतम् । त्वयि स्थितम् ॥
Vr. VI. 26 P. V.73 RT.I. 6. 24 Mk. V.81
Vr. VI. 27Hc. III. 92 Mk. V.82 T. II. 3.2
Ho. III.91
Vr. VI. 28 Pu. V.74 Mk. V. 88
Vr. VI.29Hc. JII.98 Mk. V.84 T. II.3.4
____1) अस्सिं इमस्सिं वा are not found in s. 2) s has आदिश्च । 3) P. त्थे oto. 4) The subsequent folios of the manuscript 81 are lost after this (i. e. after अस्म )। 5) P. तुमस्मि ।

Page #104

-III. 73 ]
सुबन्त-कार्यम्
૪૧
Vr. VI. 31-82 Hc. III. 99
ङसा तुमो- तुइ-तुझ- तुम्ह- तुन्भाः ॥ ६४ ॥ BF. 1. 6. 27 F. 11. 3, 12
Mk. V. 91
तुमो धणं ॥ तव धनम् ॥
ते दे च टा-ङसभ्याम् ||६||
ते कअ । दे धणं ॥ त्वया कृतम् । तव धनम् ॥
तत्तो पडिओ ॥ त्वत् पतितः ॥
भ्यसा तुम्भाहिं तो तुम्भासु तो ॥६६॥
तुम्भाहि तो पडिओ ॥ युष्मत् पतितः ॥
वो तुझा तुम्हाणमामा ॥ ७० ॥
धणं वो ॥ युष्माकं धनम् ॥
॥७१॥
सुपा तुझे तुम्हे तुझे तुम्हे ठिअ ' ॥ युष्मासु स्थितम् ॥
सुनास्मदो हं अह अह अम्हि ||७२ ||
टया तुमाइ च ॥ ६६॥
तुमाइ कअ ॥ त्वया कृतम् ॥ तुम्हे तुमेहिं भिसा ॥६७॥
तुम्हेहिं कअ तुम्भेहिं वा ॥ युष्माभिः कृतम् ॥ ङसिना तत्तो- तइतो तमादु' - तुमादु-तुमाहि ॥ ६८ ॥ - V. 88
Vr VI, 85
* पुच्छामि ॥ अहं पृच्छामि ॥
4
अमा अम्मि अहम्मि* ॥ ७३ ॥
अम्मि पुच्छ || मां पृच्छ ॥
5
1) P. ते ; I has only दे । अस्मि असम्मि | 5 ) AP अस्मि |
Vr. VI. 30.33Hc, III. 94 Mk. V. 85, 92 T. II. 8. 5

Vr. VI. 30-33 Mk. VI. 85
Vr. VI. 34 Mk, V. 89
Vr. VI. 36 Mk. V. 89
Hc. III.94 T. II. 3. 5
Vr, VI39
Mk. V. 95
Vr. VI. 37 Hc. III. 100 T. II. 3.13
Mk. V. 93
Hc. III, 95 T. II. 3, 10
Ho. III. 108 T. II. 3.9
Vr. VI. 40-41 Hc. III. 105 Pu. V. 75....
T. II. 3. 15
Mk. V. 97

Vr. VI. 41- Ho, III, 107 42 T. II. 3. 19
Mk. V. 98
2) Only S has तमादु । 3) P. ठ्ठि 4 ) APS.

Page #105

Ho. III. 106 T.II.8.16,17
Vr. VI. 43
Ho. III. 108 T. II. 3,17-18
46
Ho. III. 110
Vr. VI.47 Mk, V.105
संक्षिप्तसारे प्राकृताध्यायः
[III. 74
Vr. VI. 43 - अम्हे जसा ॥४॥
Mk. V. 101 अम्हे जाणिमो ।। वयं जानीमः ॥
शसा अम्हणो च ॥७॥ अम्हे पुच्छ अम्हेणो वा । अस्मान् पृच्छ ।।
Vr. VI. 45- He. III. 109 टया मे मइ मए ॥६॥
T. II. 3. 20
Mk. V. 103 मे क ॥ मया कृतम् ॥
अम्हेहिं भिसा ॥७७॥ अम्हेहि क। अस्माभिः कृतम् ॥ - उसिना मत्तो-मइत्तो-ममादो-ममादु-ममाहि ॥७८॥ मत्तो पडिओ॥ मत् पतितः ।
Mk. V. 106 भ्यसा अम्हाहि तो अम्हासुतो ॥७९॥ NE.V. 100 अम्हाहितो पडिओ॥ अस्मत् पतितः ॥
मे-मम-मह-मज्मा उसा ॥८॥ धणं मे ॥ धनं मम ॥
आमा मज्माण अम्हो अम्ह अम्हाणो ॥८॥ मज्झाणं धणं ॥ अस्माकं धनम् ॥
Vr. VI. 51_Ho. III. 114 डिना ममम्मि'-मइ-मए ॥२॥ ममम्मि ठि ॥ मयि स्थितम् ॥
सुपा अम्ह सु ॥३॥ अम्हेसु वसइ ॥ अस्मासु वसति ॥ 1) P. ममस्मि। 2) P. ठ्ठि ।
r. VI. 49
H. III. 112
Vr. VI48Hc. III. 111 Mk. V. 109
Mk. V. 110
Hc. III. 116
Vr. III.52 Mk. V.111
Ho. III.117
Vr. VI. 63 Mk. V.112

Page #106

-III. 89]
सुबन्त-कार्यम्
४७
द्वि-त्र्योर्दो-ती ॥४॥
Vr. VI. 56 He. III. 118 Pu. V.76-17
T. II. 3. 29 Mk.V.113-14.
Vr. VI64-566c, III. 119 Pu. V.79-80 Mk. V.115-16
Pu.V.79
खादौ परे द्वि-त्र्योः स्थाने दो ती इत्येतौ भवतः । दोहि। तीहिं। तीसुतो॥
टीका। द्वाभ्यामिति प्रकृतेर्दोहिं इति भिसो हि अत एच्च सर्वत्र कवचनवद् द्विवचनम् ।।1
दोण्हि-तिण्हि जस-शसभ्याम् ॥८॥ Pu. V. 79-80. तयोः स्थाने जस्-शस्भ्यां सह दोहि तिहि इत्येतौ भवतः। दोहि अच्छति । तिहि भणंति ।। द्वे१ वे दोणि च ॥८६॥
Vr. VI. 57 He. III. 120 दुवे भणंति ॥
चतुरश्चत्तारो चत्ताति ॥८७॥ Puvi चतुरः स्थाने जस्-शस्भ्यां सह चत्तारो चत्तारि इत्येतौ भवतः। चत्तारो भणंति । चत्तारि भणति ।।
चउरन्यत्र ॥८॥ चऊहि। चऊसुतो॥ तेषामामो ण्हं ॥८॥
MR. V. 121 तेषां द्वि-त्रि-चतुर्णामामः स्थाने ण्ह भवति। दोण्ह। तिव्हं। चउण्डं ॥
इति सुबन्त-कार्य निवृत्तम् ॥
Hc. III. 122
Vr. VI.58 Pu' V.81 Mk. V. 119
Vr. VI. 60 Hc. III. 17
(Vrtti) T. II. 2.23 Pu. V.78 Mk. V. 120
Vr.VI.69Hc. III. 128 Pu. v.82
T. II. 3.34
____1) This tika is found in s only. 2) S. बेनी । 3) PS. चत्वारो चत्वारि । 4) 8. चऊ-15) निवृत्तम् is nob found in ABCCISP. .

Page #107

Ho. III.189 T. II. 4.1
Vr. VII.
1 Pu. VI. 1-2 RT.I.7.1 Mk. VI.7
Vr. VII.1 RT.I. 7.2 Mk. VI. 7
Ho. III. 139 T. II. 4. 1
Vr. VI1.2 Pu. VI. 4.
Ho. III. 140 7. II. 4. 2
चतुर्थः परिच्छेदः
तिङन्त-कार्यम् प्रथमादेरेकमिदादियोः ॥१॥ द्वयोः परस्मैपदात्मनेपदयोः प्रथम-पुरुषादेरेकवचनम्। इदादिभवति ॥ प्रथमपुरुषस्य । पचइ संकइ॥
एद्वा ॥२॥ पचए। संकए।
सि-सयौ मध्यमस्य ॥३॥ पचसि पचसे। संकसि संकसे॥
मिड उत्तमस्य ॥४॥ पचामि। संकामि॥
बहु न्त्यादिः॥॥ द्वयोः प्रथमादेवहुवचनं न्त्यादि भवति ।। प्रथमपुरुषस्य ॥ पचंति । संकंति ॥
हत्थौ मध्यमस्य ॥६॥ पचह पचत्थ। संकह संकत्थ ॥
उत्तमस्य मो-मु-माः ॥७॥ पचामो पचामु पचाम। संकामो संकामु सकाम ॥ टीका। मिङा दी| वा (IV. 41) इति दीर्घः ।।
Vr. VII.3 Pu. VI.7 RT.I.7.3
Ho. III. 141 T. II. 4.3
Vr. VII. 4 Mk. VI. 8
H. III. 142 T. II. 4.4
Ho. III,143 RT. II. 4.5
Vr. VII. 4 Pu. VI. 5 RT.I.7.8 Mk. VI.8
Vr. VIL.
4 Pu. VI.8 RT.I.7.3 Mk.I.8
Ho. III. 144 T. II. 4. 6
1) S. रेकम् ।
2) S. अन्त्यादि । 3) पुरुष is found in S. 4) Found in S.

Page #108

147
Mk. VI.16
T. II.4.24
-IV. 16] तिङन्त-कार्यम्
४६
____vr. VII. 6-4 10. III. 146सि-म्हस्तेः सिङ -मिङ भ्याम् ॥८॥
. II. 4. 8-9 सिङ्-मिङ्भ्यां सह अस्तेः स्थाने सि म्हि इत्येतौ भवतः॥ जइ सि। गओम्हि ।।
उत्तम-बहूनां म्होम्हौ ।।३।। आगअम्हो आगअम्ह वा॥
अच्छोऽन्यत्र ॥१०॥ अच्छइ अच्छति। अच्छह अच्छत्थ वा॥
Vr. VII. 26 Ho. III. 164 भूत-विहितैकवचनेनासिः ॥११॥ आसि राआ तं वा हवा॥ टोका। आसीद राजेति प्राकृते सौ च वेति दीर्घः ॥
यक ईअ-इज्जौ ||१२।। यकः स्थाने ईअ- इज्ज इत्येतो आदेशौ भवतः ॥ सहीअइ सहिज्जइ वा।
गमाद्यन्तो यका द्विर्वा ॥१३।। Vr. VI. 9 गम्मइ । भण्णइ ॥ गमीअइ गमिज्जइ वा॥
स्थादेराल्ल क् ॥१४॥ ठीअइ। ठिज्जइ॥ स्थीयते ॥ लुडादौ हिङ् ॥१॥
Vr. VII, 13 Hc. III. 166 लुट-लूट-लक्षु परेषुधातोरुत्तरे हिङ भवति ॥ होहिइ होहिंति होहित्थ ॥
स्सा-हा चोत्तमे ॥१६॥ लुडादिषूत्तमे पुरुषे परे स्सा हा हिङ् च भवति ॥ होस्सामि होहामि होहिमि।
Vr. VII.
8 H . III.160 Pu. VI.33T. II. 4.91 Mk. VI. 10
T. II. 4.25
___Vr. VII. 13 मc, III. 167 Mk. VI. 24, T. II. 4. 26
26.
1) Found in S only. 2) P. ठीजइ। 3) S omits this.

Page #109

Vr VII. 14
He. III. 169 T. II. 4. 33
Vr. VII.15Ac. III. 168
7. I.7.6. T. II. 4.27
Vr. VII.16 Ho.III 170.171 Pu. VI. 18-20 T.II. 4.28, 82 RT.I. 7.7-8 Mk. V-29
संक्षिप्तसारे प्राकृताध्यायः
[IV.17मिङा सह सं हिस्सं वा ॥१७॥ होस्सं होहिस्सं वा ।।
मो-मु-मेषु' हि-स्सा हित्था वा ॥१८॥ . होस्सामो होहामो होहिमो । होहिस्सामोहोहित्थामो होहिस्सा होहित्था । मो-मु-मैवेत्येके ॥
क्रादेः काहमादिमिङा ।।१६।। - लुडादौ परे मिङा सह कृनादेः स्थाने काहमादिर्भवति ॥ काहं । दा दाह। व वोच्छं। श्रु सोच्छं। गम्ल गच्छं। रुद् रोच्छं। मुचल मोच्छ। विद् विच्छ॥
वच्छथादिर्वचादेर्हेलुग वा ॥२०॥ लुडादौ परे वचादेः स्थाने वच्छयादिर्भवति ॥ तत्र हेलुग वा भवति ॥ वच्छिहिइ वच्छिइ वा। वच्छिहिंति वच्छिति वा। सोच्छिइ। गच्छि।। रुच्छिइ। मोच्छिइ । विच्छिइ ॥
लुग वा मिङश्च ॥२१॥ वच्छिहिमि वच्छिमि वच्छि वा ।।
लुङादेरीअः ॥२२॥ लङ -लुङ-लिटा स्थाने ईओ भवति ॥ हसीअ॥
ऋतो डीअः कुन-वर्जम् ॥२३॥ मरीअ। कृअस्तु काहीअ॥
Op.Vr.VII.17 Pu. VI.18-19 RT. I. 7.7-8
He. III. 17 T. II.4.28
Vr. VII. 23.
1) g is not found in S. 2) Found only in S. 3) P includes this in the sutra No. 18. 4) SP. विश् विच्छम् ।। 5) P. मोजिछह ।

Page #110

-IV. 31]
तिङन्त-कार्यम् अजन्ताद् ही ॥२४॥ अजन्ताद्धातोरुत्तरस्य लङादेः स्थाने हीअ इत्ययमादेशो भवति॥ होहीअ॥ नानेकाचः ॥२॥
Vr. VII. 22 दलिदाई॥
उ स्स [ सं'] लिङ-लोटोरेकत्वे ॥२६।। प्रथमपुरुषादेरेकत्वे लिङ्-लोटोः स्थाने यथाक्रमम् उ स्स [ सं1 ] इत्येते भवन्ति ॥ हसउ। हसस्स । हसस्सं ॥
स्सस्याद् वा ॥२७॥ हस। वह। भिंद ॥ न्तु-ह-मो बहुषु ॥२८॥
Vr. VII. 19 बहुषु लिङ-लोटोः स्थाने यथाक्रम न्तु ह मो इत्येते भवन्ति ॥ होतु । होह। होमो॥
ज्ज.ज्जा वाजन्ताल्लडादौ ॥२६॥ लट्-लङ -लुङ -लिट्-लिङ-लोट-लुडादौ परेऽजन्ताद्धातोरुत्तरे ज्ज-ज्जा इत्येतौ वा भवतः ॥ लट। होइ होजइ होज्जाइ वा॥ लङ लुङ लिट् । होहीअ होईअ होज्जईअ होजाईअ वा। लिङ लोट। होउ होज्जउ होजाउ वा ॥ लुट लट् लङ । होहिइ होज्जहिइ होजाहिइ वा ॥
लङ -लुङ -लिङ भिर्वा ॥३०॥ होइ होहीअ होज होज्जा वा ॥ नानेकाचः ॥३१॥
I. दलिदाइ ॥
1) Emended by me. P reads स्म ।

Page #111

संक्षिप्तसारे प्राकृताध्यायः
[IV. 32ऋद्-उद्धलभ्यः शङ लडादौ ॥३२॥ लट्-लोट्-लङ -लिङसु परेषु ऋदन्तोदन्त-हलन्तेभ्यो धातुभ्य उत्तरे शङ भवति ॥ मरइ। रवइ। देवइ ॥ कचित् शः ॥ पुरइ । फुरइ ॥
दादेरजेत् ॥३३॥ लडादौ परे दादेरजेद् भवति ।। देई। धेहि ॥
इदन्तस्य णोण्णः ॥२४॥ एण्णइ । कारेण्णइ॥
अइलुंडादौ ॥३॥ दइहिइ ॥
अदेङ वा ॥३६॥ लडादौ परे अकार एङ वा भवति ॥ हसइ हसेइ वा । चअइ चएइ वा ॥
हाविङ ऋद्धल्भ्याम् ॥३०॥ हो परे ऋतो हलश्चोत्तरे इङ भवति ॥ एङ वा॥ मरिहिइ मरेहिइ वा। पडिहिइ पडेहिइ वा॥
सेङ ऋद्भ्यां तु-तव्य -वासु ॥३८॥ vr. VII. 38 हसिउं हसेउं वा॥ हसिअव्वं हसेअव्वं वा॥ हसिऊण हसेऊण वा॥ मरिसं मरेङ वा ॥
Vr. VII.34
प्रायेणेङ ऋतःक्ने ॥३६॥ धरिओ। ओसरिओ॥ कचिन्न स्यात् । अम को।
1) In P this is given as a separate सूत्र ( No. 33 ). 2) P. तु तव्यम् । P.-तूण। 4) In P this is given as a separak sutra ( no. 41).
3)

Page #112

Vr. VII. 26-27
Vr. VIII. 24 Ho. IV. १
T. III. 1.69
-IV. 44] . तिङन्त-कार्यम्
बहूत्तमे ॥४०॥ बहु-वचने उत्तमे परे इङ भवति वा ॥ हसिमो हसामो वा ॥
मिड्याद् दी? वा ॥४॥ हसामि हसमि वा॥
णिङश्चा[वै] एङ वा ॥४२॥ णिङः स्थाने आवे भवति ॥ एङ वा॥ कारावेइ कारेइ वा॥
आविर्वा त.भावकर्मसु ॥४३॥ Vr. VII. 28 कारिओ काराविओ वा। कारिजइ काराविज्जइवा
[अथ घात्वादेशाः] जल्पादेर्ज पादिः ॥४४॥ जल्पादेर्धातोः स्थाने जंपादिर्भवति ॥ जंपइ॥ (१) धूर्ण धोण ॥ (२) त्वरा तुवर ॥ (३) णुद णोण्ण ॥ (४) दुङ दुम्म ॥ (५) पाटि फाल" ॥ (६) जभि जंभाअ जिंभाअ॥ (७) तृप् थिप्प थेप्प ॥ (८) घट गढ ।। (६) सन्सु ओस ॥ (१०) निषद णुमज ॥ (११) आङ रम् आढव ॥ (१२) उत्-शत् उत्थल (१३) पिबति घोट्ट ॥ (१४) अस घिस ॥ (१५) चित्र चिण ॥ (१६) क्षि जिज्म' ॥ (१७) क्षिप् विज ॥ (१८) भिद् भिंद ॥ (१६) छिद् छिद11 ॥ (२०) कथ कड्ढ ॥ (२१) वृधु वुड्ढ12 ॥ (२२) हन् हम्म13 ॥ (२३) व्रज वच्च ॥ (२४) नृति 4 णच ॥ (२५) बुध बुज्झ15 ॥ (२६) युध जुज्झ ॥ (२७) प्रच्छ् पुच्छ ॥ (२८) शद्लू सड16 ॥ (२६) पत्ल पड ॥ (३०) पठ, पढ17 ॥
1) P. आरे। ) P. डारिर। 3) P. कारारिओ। 4) P. कारारिज्जह । 5) V reads जम्पादिर्जल्पादेः। 6) P. दुख दूम्म । 7) P. फाल and काल | 8) Not found in DV. ५) P. धस । 10) D. जिज्म ! P. मिज्म । 11) DV. छिथ ।। 12) DV. वद्ध ।। 13) P. हम्म हह्य ॥ 14) DV. नृती। 15) P. वुज्ज 11 16) P. सड्ढ । 17) After this P has तक्ष ; वप्प वच्छ ; but D gives them after the sutra
No. 46.

Page #113

५४
-
संक्षिप्तसारे प्राकृताध्यायः
[IV. 45(३१) सक्ष वप्प वच्छ। (३२) तमु तम्म । (३३) खिद् विसूर (३४) क्रुध कुज्म ॥ (३५) क्रन्द जूर ॥ (३६) त्रस वज्ज ॥ (३७) भुज विअल ॥ (३८) चर्वं चव्य ॥ (३६) चर्च चच्च ॥ (४०) श्रत्-पूर्वधा सहद ॥ (४१) उत् पूर्वमा उद्ध् म ॥ (४२) अवपूर्वगाह ओवाड । (४३) अवपूर्वकास् ओवास ॥ (४४) निर्माङ निम्माण ॥ (४५)उद्विज उव्वेज' ॥ (४६) मृद् मल: ।। (४७) परि-मृज् परिमइल ।।
Vr. VIII. 23 Rc. I. 7 RT. I.8.6 T. II. 4. 130 Mk. VJI. 18
ज्ञो जाण-आणौ ॥४शा जाणइ आणइ वा ॥
Hc. IV. 63, Vr. VIII. 19
238 Pu. VII.16 RT. I.8.7 T. II. 4.136, Mk. VII, 29-30
भीयो भा-बीहौ ॥४६॥ भाइ बीहइ ।।
11
Vr. VIII.18 Ho. IV. 74 RT. I.8.3 T. III. 1.12 Mk. VII.14
स्मरतेर्भर सुमरी ॥४७॥ भरइ11 सुमरइ वा ॥
कृपः खिप्पः॥४८॥ खिप्पइ ॥
मसजो वुड्ड"खुप्पौ ॥४६॥
Vr. VIII.68 RT.I.8.23 Ho. IV. 101 Mk. VII.98 T. III. 1.45
वुड13 खुप्पइ॥
1) P. तम्म तह्म । 2) VP. ज्वर ; but not found in D. 3) P. ओजो; D. भुजो। 4) P. चप्प। 5) D. सद्दइ । 6) After this D gives कृप् खिप्प । 7) P. ओव्वैव ॥ 8) DV. मण ॥ 9) This and the subsequent sutras are included under the F4 class in DV, but the examples are not given by DV. 10) D. मर। 11) D. मरइ । 12) D. मस्जेर्व क ।

Page #114

-IV. 58 ]
तिङन्त-कार्यम्
Vr. VIII.49Hc. IV.218, RT.I.8.12 Mk. VII. 69 T. II. 4. 61,
1239
69
Vr. VIII. 67 RI. I.8 23 Mk. VII. 66
Ho. IV.105 T.III. 1.48
Vr. VIII. 13 He. IV..66, Pu. VII. 5
284-86 RT.I.8.3-4 T. III, 1.20 ME.VII.112 II.4.66-67
Vr. VIII. 17 Ho. IV.214 RT.I.8.4 Mk. VII. 113-14
Vr. VIII.1 Hc. IV.80 Pu. VII.1 TIII.1.1 RT.I.8.1 Mk. VII.1,102
रुधो रुभ-रुधौ ॥५०॥ रुभइ । रुधइ॥
मृजेर्लभ-सुपौ ॥५॥ लुभइ । सुपइ ॥
कृा कर-कुणौ ॥५२॥ करइ कुणइ वा ॥
हीअ-हि-तु-तव्यक्तासु का ॥५३॥ काहीअ । काहिइ। काउं। काअव्वं । काऊण ॥
भुवो हो-हुवौ ॥५४॥ होइ। हुवइ ।
हः के ॥५॥ हूअं ॥
प्रादेहवः ॥५६॥ पहवइ ।।
द्विरन्तो लगादेः ॥७॥ लग्गइ। तुट्टइ।
शकेश्चअ-तर-तीराश्च ॥८॥ सक्का। चअइ । तरइ। तीरइ ।। 1) D. रुस्त । 2) D. लुड-प्रसौ। 3) P. कुणई ।
. IV. 64 . III.1.1
T
Vr. VIII.2 Pu. VII.
2 RT. I. 8.1 Mk. VII.3
Vr. VIII.B RT. I. 8.
1 Mk. VII.2
Hc. IV.60 . III. 1.1
T
Vr. VIII. 52 Ro. IV. 230 RT.I.8.14.26T. II.4.63 Mk. VII. 84
Vr. VIII. 52 Hc. IV. 86
70 RT. I.8.25.14 T.III.1.37 Mk. VII. 66,84

Page #115

५६
संक्षिप्तसारे प्राकृताध्यायः
[ IV. 59
Vr. VIII. 63 RT. I. 8.16 Mk. VII.85
Hc. IV. 231 T. II. 4. 62
Vr. VIII. 64 Hc. IV. 232 RT I.8.16 T. II.4.61 Mk. VII. 86
Hc. IV.209 T. II.4.157
Vr. VIII. 15 Pu. VII.8 Ho.I.8.4 Mk. VII.96
स्फुट-चलोर्वा ॥६॥ फुटइ फुट्टइ वा। चलइ चल्लइ वा ॥
प्रादेर्मीलश्च ॥६॥ पमोलइ पमिल्लइ वा॥
ग्रहेर्गेण्हः ॥६॥ गेण्हइ॥
घे तु-तव्य-नासु ॥६२॥ घेउं॥
म्लै वा वाअश्च ॥६३॥ वाइ वाअइ वा ॥
दृशेणिअच्छ-पुलअ-अबज्म-पेच्छ -सच्चर -पेक्खाः ॥६॥ णिअच्छइ । पुलअइ इत्यादि।
Hc. IV.210
Vr. VIII.16 Pu. VII. 9 Mk. VIL.97
Vr. VIII.21 Mk. VII.31
He. IV.18 T.II.4.44
Vr.VIII.69Hc. IV.181 Pu. VII. 17 T. II. 4. 158 RI. I. 8.23 Mk. VII. I05 Vr. VIII. 40 Ho. IV.221 Pu. VII. 11 T. II. 4.56 Mk. VII, 71
वेढोवेष्टः ॥६॥ वेढइ॥
Vr. VIII. 41 Hc. IV.222, Pu. VII. 11
223 RT.I.8.14T. II.4.57 Mk. VII. 72
वेल्लः समुद्भ्याम् ॥६६॥ संवेल्लइ। उव्वेल्लइ ॥ रुषादेदीर्घ श्च ॥६॥
Vr. VIII.46 Hc. IV.236, Pu. VII. 21
239 RT. I. 8.12 T II. 4.68-69 Mk. VII.83
रूसइ। दूसइ। तूसइ। मूसइ ।
1) Not found in D. 2) P. ह्ये 3) P. णिअक्क पुणअ ; D. पुणष 4) Not found in D. 5) P. सच्छर, 6) In P these two sābras ( Nos. 66 and 67 ) are includsa in one सूत्र ( P, No. 67) 7) श्च is omitted by P.

Page #116

-IV. 74]
-
तिङन्त-कार्यम्
५७
Vr. VIII. 42Hc. IV. 238 RT.I.8.24.11T. II.4.71 Mk. VII.100,80
धुवादिर्धावादेः ॥६॥ धुवइ धुब्वइ धोवइ ॥ रुद्। रुवइ रुव्वइ रोवइ रोअइ रुअइ ।।
Vr. VIII. 30 Pu. VII.14 RT.I.8.8 Mk. VII. 38
Hc. IV.62 T. II.122
123
क्रीनः किणः ॥६॥ किणइ ।।
वे के र्वा' द्विश्च कः ॥७॥ विक्किणइ विक्के इ वा ॥
Vr. VIII. 31Hc. IV, 620. Pu. VII. 1
242 RT, I. 8.8 T. II.4.12 Mk. VII.39
123
Vr. VIII. 11 He. IV. 187. Pu. VII.19
236 RT.I.8.2 T. III.1.109 Mk. VII.76, II.4.67
53
ऋतोरिषादेः॥७॥ वरिसइ ।। कृष् मृष् हृष्३ जष् ॥
अन्तेरः ॥७२॥ अन्ते स्थितस्य ऋतः स्थाने अर आदेशो भवति ॥ हरइ। धरइ इति वक्तव्यम् ।।
Vr. VIII. 12 Pu. VII. 20
ल्वादे! ह्रस्वश्च ॥७३॥
Vr. VIII. 66 Hc, IV. 241 Pu. VII. 24 RT. I. 8.18 Mk. VII. 87,90, 93
लुणइ ॥ श्रु हु जि धूञ॥
Vr. VIII. 67Hc. IV. 241 RT.I.8.19 T. II 4.72 Mk. VI. 96
यग्वा व्वश्च ॥७४॥ लुणिज्जइ। लुव्वइ ।।
1) PD. Wafı 2) Found only in DV. 3) Found only in P. 4) This sūtra and its vștti are found only in DV. 5) This portion from धरइ to वक्तव्यम् is found only in D.

Page #117

संक्षिप्तसारे प्राकृताध्यायः
[ IV. 75
Vr. VIII. 25 Ho. IV.16.24 Pu. VII. 22 T. II. 4. 70 RT. I.8. 9
127 Mk. VII. 60,102
ठाअ आदिः ष्ठादेः ॥७॥ ठा ति। ध्यै झाअंति। । गै गाअंति ॥
ठादिवैकवचने ॥७६॥ ठाइ ठाअइ वा ॥
खादेः खा नित्यम् ॥७७॥ खाइ॥
तु-तव्य-क्लास्वन्तलुग् भुजादेः ॥८॥ P भोउं । रोउं । भोतव्वं । भोऊणः । इत्यादि।
Vr. VIII. 27 Ho. IV. 228 RT. I. 8. 10 T, II.4.53 Mk. VII.59
Ho. IV.212 . II. 4.45
Vr. VIII.55 Pu. VII.31T RT.I.8.16-17 Mk. VII. 102
हीरादिर्हादेवकर्मणोः ॥७॥
Vr. VIII.57 Ho. IV. 250,
60245 RT.I. 8-20 T. II 4.81, Mk. VII. 173
76
भावे कर्मणि च वाच्ये हृलादेः स्थाने हीरादिर्भवति ॥ हीरीअइ हीरिजा ।। हृञ् हीर । ऋष जीर। कृञ् कीर । वद् वच्छ। दुह, दुज्झ' | लिह, लिज्म । वह, वज्झ' ||
वा सयका च ॥८॥ हीरीअइ हीरइ वा ॥
ज्ञो वा णज-णव्वौ सयकश्च ॥८शा RT I. 8. 20_H0. IV. 252
Mk. VII. 180 जाणीअइ आणीअइ। गज्जीअइ णवीअइ। णज्जइ णव्वइ वा ।।
1) P. asfaa 2) This is not found in D. 3) Not found in D. 4) Not found in P. 5) P. दुच्छ । 6) P. लिब्भ 7) P. वम। 8) D. सयकश्च

Page #118

-IV. 83-11] -
तिङन्त-कार्यम्
५६
Vr. VIII. 16 Hc. IV. 256 RI. I.8.2 T. I.2.11 Mk. VII. 178T. I. 4.36
Vr. VIII. 62 Hc. I. 46 Pu. VII.82 T. II. 4.84 RT. I. 8.21 Mk. VII. 182
Vr. IX.2
Vr. IX.3 Pu. VIII. 2
ग्रहेपेप्पो वा सयकश्च ॥२॥ गेण्हिज्जइ घेप्पिज्जइ घेप्पइ वा ॥
दादेर्दिण्णदिः केन ॥३॥ दिण्णं । रुद् रुण्णं इत्यादि । प्राकृतं गाथादौ संस्कृतवच्छेषः ॥ सलिलं रहसि ॥
[ अथ निपाताः ] १. हुं दान-पृच्छा-निर्धारणेषु ॥ vr. IX. 2 २. मिअ-वेअ अवधारणे ॥ ३. ओ पश्चात्ताप-सूचनारोपण-वितर्केषु ।। vr. IX. 4 ४. इर-किर-किला अनिश्चिताख्याने ॥vr. IX, F ५. [हुँ क्ख] निश्चय-वितर्क-सूचनासु ॥r. IX. 6 ६. इजेरा पादपूरणे ॥ ७. णवरः केवले ॥ ८. तुरं हायें ॥ 8. णवरि आनन्तये ॥ १०. उ भय-विस्मयाक्षेप-वितर्क-सुचनासु ॥ ११. कीस-कीणौ प्रश्ने ।
Vr. IX. 9
Vr. IX.7 Pu. VIII. 6
Vr. IX. 8 Pu. VIII. 7
1) After this D has वा। 2) P. संस्कृत-वचन विशेषः। 3) D. वहसि ।। 1) P. निवारणेषु । In P these are given under the वृत्ति of the sutra No833; but here these have been treated as separate sutras. . . 5) P. च्छे । 6) P. कुथु ; emended by me. 7) मनः 8) LP. गवरि ।।

Page #119

Vr.IX.12
संक्षिप्तसारे प्राकृताध्यायः [IV. 83-12१२. अव्वो दुख-सूचना-संभाषणेषु ॥ Vr. IX. 10 १३. अलाहि' निवारणे ॥
Vr. Ix. 11 १४. अइ वले संभावने ॥ १५. णवि वैपरीत्ये॥
Vr. IX. 13 १६. वेवें आमन्त्रणे ॥ १७. थु कुत्सायाम् ॥ १८. रे अरे हिरे संभाषण-रतिकलहाक्षेपेषु ।। Vr. IX. 15 १६. पिव-मिव-विव-वन्वा इवार्थे ।
इत्यादि देशीसारो निपातः॥ इति तिङन्तकार्य निवृत्तम् ।।
Vr. IX.16 Pu. VIII. 8
1) P अणाहि ।। 2) P. अह, हवये । 3) P हरे

Page #120

पञ्चमः परिच्छेदः अपभ्रंशारम्भः
HO.IV.398
Pu.XVII 16 RT. III. 1.4 Mk.XVIII.3
n affert u Pu. XVII. 13 Ho. IV. 396
RT. III.1.2
Mk.XVII.2 अयुक्तानादिवर्गाद्योः स्थाने त्रि-चतुर्थों भवतः ॥ लोकानुसारादपभ्रशे ॥ वकः वग। सुखितः सुघिद ॥ अयुक्तानादीति किम्। शक्रः सक्क । कार्य कजम् ॥
अधो रो लुग वा ॥२॥ अधः स्थितस्य रेफस्य लुग् वा भवति ॥ पुत्त । पुत्तो वा ॥
अयुक्तानादेः कचित् कस्य ॥३॥ Pu. XVII. 5 कजिक कंजि॥
तस्य वा ॥४॥ गदो गओ वा॥
व्रासादिप्सादेः ॥॥ व्यासादेः स्थाने ब्रासादिर्भवति ॥ वासु भणइ ।। भाष्य भ्रास। मूक वढ' । संघ सहुः । एवम् ए। मुखे कुरइ। एवंविध एजाह। किल किर। ध्रुव ध्रु । ततः तो। कुतः कत। यत्र जेथु10 ॥ तत्र तेथु । कुत्र केथु10। अत्र एथु10। यावत् जाम। तावत् ताम ॥
Pu.XVII.14 RT.III. I.4 Mk.XVII.3
___1) BO. अहू (:) P. वगः। 2) AP. सुखिदः ।। 3) P. शक्कः | 4) Not found in A. 5) ACC1 पुत्र ; P. पुत्तू। 6) ABOO.P. वास। 7) L. वध | 8) L. सहुम् । 9) B. धरुव ध्रु। 10) AB001 P. जेथु, तेथु, केथु and कत्यु, but L has जेत्थु etc.

Page #121

[V.6
संक्षितसारे प्राकृताध्यायः इवस्य' ज्जेव्व'-जण्यादिः ॥६॥ णरु जेव्व जणि वा ॥
Pu. XVII. 26
नूनं णड णडा णावइ ॥७॥
Pu.XVII. 26
एहादिरेतदस्त्रिसम ॥८॥
Pu. XVII. 60 एह णारी णरु धणु वा॥ एहो एहे वा॥ एषा नारी एष नरः एतद् धनम् । एते नायौँ, एतौ नरौ एते धने। एता नार्यः एते नराः एतानि धनानि । एकवचनादिभेदेन एते त्रय आदेशाः ॥
जेद्यादिर्यादृशादेः स्त्र्यादौ ।।६॥ जेही णारी जेहे णरु जेहु धणु ॥ तादृक् तेही। कीहक् केही। ईदृक् एही॥
इदम इमु नपुंसके ॥१०॥ इमु धणु॥
कथं केमु-किमौ ॥११॥ केमु कहेइ। किम कहेइ॥ कथं कथयति ।।
जिम-तिमादिर्यथा-तथादेः ॥१२॥ जिम बम्हण तिम लद्ध10 ॥ जिम तिम। जेम तेम । जिध तिध। जधा तधा॥ यथा ब्राह्मणस्तथा लब्धः॥
Pu. XVII.57-58
1) B. इव्वस्य, 2) B. जेव्व। 3) B. णुरु 4) B. जेव्व। P. जेव्व । 5) जाणु 6) Not found in B and L. ?) L. णाधइ। 8) P. नारी, 9) Fcund in A only 10) A and C1 P. णद्ध ।

-

Page #122

-V. 17]
अपभ्रशारम्भः किमः किंपादिः ॥१३॥
Pu. XVII. 25 किंप भणइ । किव' कहेइ । किम कहेइ । किम कह । कहि कुप्पतिः ॥ किं भणति । किं कुप्यति ॥
गाहुल्यादिर्गाथादेरल्पादौ ॥१४|| गाहुली विहती'। खेदे हिअडा फुट्ट दइउ तुब्भ ॥ गाथा बृहती। हे हृदय, स्फुट देवं तव ॥ .
ऋद -लुतोरयुक्ता नाघोरधःस्थयोरद् वा ॥१॥ सुकृतं सुकृ सुकअं वा । कृप्त क्लत्तं कत्तं वा ॥
दीर्घादिः सम्बुद्धौ ॥१६॥ सम्बुद्धौ यथासंभवं दीर्घादिर्भवति || ढोल्ला हिअडा । हे प्रिय हृदय ॥ कचिद् ह्रस्वः [ लिङ्गस्य10 ॥ पुत्ति । क्वचिदेत्वम्11 ॥हले भग्गे। हे भाग्य ॥
जसो हो ॥१७॥ सम्बुद्धौ जसः स्थाने हो भवति ॥ अग्गिहो । महिलाहो ॥ हे अग्नयः। हे महिलाः॥
1) L. किर। Not found in B. 2) L. काहह | Not found in B. 3) Not found in BL 4) Nos found in L. 5) L. कुपादि । 6) L. गाहुण्यादिर्यथादेरल्पादौ । For the discussion of this sutra, vide s 26. 1) P वह्वति 8) In P खेदे is given as a separate sitra (No. 15). 9) L. सुकतम् सुकुतम् । 10) ABCC, PL. क्वचिद् हस्वः । लिङ्गस्य पुत्ति || In P it is given as a separate sātra No18. 11) In P it is given as a separate sūtra No 19.

Page #123

Pu.XVII. 41
Pu. XVII. 47
संक्षिप्तसारे प्राकृताध्यायः
[V. 18लुक् प्रथमा-द्वितीययोः ॥१८॥ प्रथमा-द्वितीययोलुंग भवति। पर गच्छइ महिला पुच्छइ ॥ नरो गच्छति । महिला पृच्छति ।।
अता स्वमोरुद्वा ॥१९॥ अता सह स्वमोरुद्वा भवति । णरु वहइ। धणु पेच्छइ॥ नरो वहति । धन पश्यति ॥
पुस्योच ॥२०॥ गदो मेही॥
एंटा ॥२१॥ अता सह टा ए भवति ॥ दइएण दइए वा॥
अनुस्वारश्चणः ॥२२॥ इण उत्तरप्टा ए भवति। अनुस्वारश्च ॥ वइए वइ वा । महुए महुवा । वारिणा मधुना । वारिवाचको वइ शब्दः ।।
पुसि णा वा ॥२३॥ अग्गिए' अग्गि अग्गिणा वा ॥
हिं सप्तम्याः ।।२४।। सप्तम्याः स्थाने हिं भवति ॥ अग्गिहिं महुहिं ॥ अग्नौ मधुनि ॥
रिदेतौ चाता ॥२॥ घरहिं घरि घरे वा। सुरहिं सुरि सुरे वा॥
Pu. XVII. 47
4) Not
1) B. पुच्छति। 2) Not found in B. 3) B. मुहुत्तम्, मुहनम् मुटु वा। 5) B. अग्गिम् । 6) B. दिरितौ, C1 णेरिदेतौ। ) B. चेतौ ।

Page #124

- V. 32 ]
अपभ्रं शारम्भः
भ्यसोऽतो हु ॥२६॥
अत' उत्तरस्य भ्यसः स्थाने हु" भवति ॥ रुक्खहु पडिदो ॥ वृक्षात्
पतितः ॥
ङमेर्हे" -अदू ॥२७॥
अत उत्तरस्य ङसेः स्थाने' हे - अदू इत्येतौ भवतः ॥ रुखहे रुक्खादु ॥ वृक्षात् ॥
हो - सु-स्सा ङसः ॥२८॥
अत उत्तरस्य ङसः स्थाने हो-सु-स्सा भवन्ति ॥ रुषवहो रुखसु रुक्खस्स || वृक्षस्य ||
आमो हं ॥२६॥
अत उत्तरस्य आमो हौं भवति || रुक्खहं ॥ वृक्षाणाम् ॥
६५
यसो हं ॥ ३१ ॥
तरुह देइ ॥ तरुभ्यो ददाति ||
हैं चेदुद्भ्याम् ||३०||
इदुद्भ्यामुत्तरस्यामो हें भवति ह च ॥ as as वा । तरुहे तरुह वा ॥ वारिवाचको वइ - शब्दः * । वारीणाम् । तरूणाम् ||
4
Pu. XVII. 45

हो - हं ङसि - ङसोः ||३२||
इदुद्भ्यामुत्तरयोङसि-ङसोः स्थाने हो-ह' इत्येतौ भवतः ॥ अग्गिहो
अग्गिह ॥ अग्न ेः ॥
1 ) B. अत: । 2) B, ङसे हैं only. 3) LV, रुच्छ । P. रुच्छ । 4) Not found in P. 5) BVL. देहि .
५.

Page #125

Pu.XVII. 42
संक्षिप्तसारे प्राकृताध्यायः
[V. 33हेः स्त्रियाम् ॥३३॥ स्त्रियां ङसि-डसोः स्थाने हेर्भवति ॥ खट्टाहे' || खट्टायाः ॥
पुंस क्लोबयो रिदुझ्याम् ॥३४॥ अग्गिहे महुहे' || 'अग्नः । मधुनः || जस-शसोरदोतो ॥३५॥
Pu. XVII. 42 स्त्रियां जस्-शसोः स्थाने उदोतो भवतः || खट्टाउ अच्छति। मालाओ पेच्छह । कुमारीउ अच्छति | खट्टाः सन्ति । मालाः पश्य । कुमार्यः सन्ति । टा ए ॥३६॥
Pu. XVII. 49 स्त्रियां टा ए भवति ॥ खट्टाए || कुमारीए || खट्टया। कुमार्या || - तुहं-हमु आदियुष्मदस्मदोः सुपा ॥३७॥
सुपा सह युष्मदस्मदोः स्थाने तुह हमें इत्यादिर्भवति ॥ तुह पुच्छ। हमुं पुच्छामि ॥ त्वं पृच्छ। अहं पृच्छामि || तुम्हे अम्हे जसा ||३८।।
Pu. XVII. 46 तुम्हे पुच्छह । अम्हे पुच्छाम || यूयं पृच्छथ। वयं पृच्छामः ||
शसा तुम्हहं अम्हहं ॥३६॥ तुम्हह पुच्छामि। अम्हह पुच्छह ॥ युष्मान् पृच्छामि। अस्मान् पृच्छथ ॥
अम्-डे-टा-भिस्तई अई ॥४०॥ तईपुच्छामि। अइपुच्छ ॥ त्वां पृच्छामि। मां पृच्छ ॥
Pu.XVII.64
1) B. हेः। 2) B. पुंस्कोरयो etc, i3) B. साहूहे। 4) C1. मालाउ ।' 5) C1. पेच्छइ। 6) BP. तुह्म अह्म ।

Page #126

अपभ्रंशारम्भः
1
1
तुम्हे हिं' अम्हेहिं' भिसा || ४१ ||
तुम्हहिं । दिण्णं ॥ युष्माभिर्दन्तम् ॥
[ -V. 48 ]
7
तुह- तुहु' - मज्म- महु ङसि - ङसभ्याम् ||४२ || Pu. XVII. 67 तुह जादो || त्वजातः ||
युष्मदः तुज्झ तुम्भश्च ||४३||
तुम्हाम्हो 'भ्याम्भ्याम् ||४४||
'तुम्ह जादो ॥ युष्मजातः ॥
2
सुपा तुम्हा तुम्हासु ठिअ ॥ युष्मासु स्थितम् ॥
अम्हासु * || ४५ ||
Pu. XVII. 65
दु यत्- दोरमा || ४६ ॥
Pu. XVII. 55
अमा सह यत्-तदोः स्थाने ब्रु द्र् इत्येतौ भवतः ॥ चितेसि द्र पावसि ॥ यच्चिन्तयसि तत् प्राप्नोषि ||
ता-स्वयोर्दा तूणपणाः ॥ ४८ ॥
ता- त्वयोः स्थाने दा- तूणप्पणा भवन्ति ॥
मणुसपण || मनुष्यता मनुष्यत्वं वा ॥

5
सप्तम्या द्रुतद्रु !! ४७|
6
6
सप्तम्या सह यत्-तदोः स्थाने जद्रु " तद्रु इत्येतौ भवतः ॥ जदु वसदि || यत्र वसति ॥

Pu. XVII. 56 RT III. 1. 20
६७
Pu. XVII. 39
1) BCC 1 P. तुझे हि अ हि 2 ) B. तुहश्च । 3 ) AB तह्माम्दो 4 ) BC P. तुह्मासु अह्मासु 5) Not found in B. 6) BP. यह तह | 7 ) ACC1 P. तुण |
मणुसदा । मणुसतूण ।

Page #127

දිරි
तव्य इब्वङ्' || ४६ ||
तव्य इव्वङ् भवति ॥ करिव्वं ॥ कर्तव्यम् ||
संक्षिप्तसारे प्राकृताध्यायः
क्ल एव्यादिः || ५० ||
प
Pu. XVII. 32
तः
: स्थाने' एव्यादिर्भवति || रमेवि । रमेपि । रमेपिणु || रंत्वा
रमयित्वा वा ॥
यचश्चेअः || ५१ ॥
भविअ । परिभविअ । आहलिअ पडिपडिअ णउट्ठादि * || परिभाव्य । आहूय प्रतिपत्य नोत्तिष्ठति ॥
ऋतोऽचि गुणः || ५३ ||
मरेप्प || मृत्वा मर्तुम् वा ॥
Pu. XVII. 38
तुमोऽणमादिश्च || ५२ ॥
तुमः स्थानेऽणमादिर्भवति । एव्यादिश्च ॥ लहेवि । लहेप्पि | लहेप्पिणु ।
5
लहणं लहतुं लहेव्वतुं ॥ लब्धुम् ॥
उतोऽन्वादेरुवः ।। ५४ ॥
बत्तुं ॥ ल्वादेस्तु लुणेप्पि || वक्तुम् । लब्धा लब्धुं वा ॥
Pu. XVII. 34
एप्येपिण्वोरेल्लुग् ब्रुञः ||५५||
अ उत्तरयोः एप्पि - एप्पिणोरेल्लुग् भवति ||
उक्त वक्तुम् वा ॥

[V.49

भूत्वा ।
1) ABCC 1 इब्वौ 2 ) Not found in B. 3) B, मव । 4) C1 णउठादि 5) C1 लहेव्वहुम् । 6 ) B. व्रमः ।
बोपि बोप्पिणु ॥

Page #128

V. 62]
3
ट्ठादि: स्थादेः ||५७॥
गमोर्वा ॥ ५६ ॥
कृ-गमोरेप्पि - एप्पिण्वो ' रेल्लुग् वा भवति || करेप्पि कृप्पि वा । गमेप्पि
प्पि वा ॥
अपभ्रं शारम्भः
Mk. XVIII. 10
टुप्पि ||
तिष्ठति ॥
8
स्थादेः स्थाने ट्ठादिर्भवति ॥ ट्ठादि [ अवेदि ] । मृङ् मरे [ मरेदि ] | [ पस्सेदि ] | व्रज् वज [ वजेदि ] । ब्रुञ्' ब्रो [ ब्रोदि ] ॥
धृङ् धरे " [ धरेदि ] ।
हो भुवोऽनुपसर्गे तिङि || ५८ ||
होदि ॥ उपसर्गे तु अणुहवदि ॥ भवति । अनुभवति ||
Pu. XVII. 35
9
"तु क्लोश्व ग्रहेर्गेहः ||५६ ॥
गेहेपि । गेहेष्पिणु । गेहेदि ॥ ग्रहीतुम् । गृहीत्वा ।
12.
" स्तध्वमोः ॥६२॥
यग् इजो वा । ६०||
यक इजो वा भवति ॥ सुमरिजदि सुमरिजदि वा ॥ स्मर्यते ॥

Mk. XVIII. 8
1
लोटस्तध्वमोः स्थाने ऊ भवति ॥ देऊ संकऊ ॥
स्वन
" हिस्वाविदादिः ॥ ६१ ॥
हिस्वौ इदादिर्भवति ॥ करि करे कुरु 11 करहि ॥ कुरु कुरुष्व ॥

se
4 अव
दशू पस्स
गृह्णाति ॥
1 ) L. एप्पिण्णु । 2) After this C1 has भवति वा । 3) PL. ठ्ठादिः । 4) B. स्मर अर ! 5) B. मरो, L. मार। 6 ) L. धार । 7 ) Not found in B. 8) B. 9) ABCC 1 P तुङ | 10 ) B. दा 13) AC1. उर मवति ।
।
11 ) L. करु । 12 ) AC 1. उस्तध्वमोः ।

Page #129

संक्षिप्तसारे प्राकृताध्यायः
[V.63. हुडाम-डामहै ॥३॥
लोटो ङाम-डामहै हुं भवति ॥ देहुँ। संकहुँ॥ वयं ददामः । वयं शङ्कामहे ॥
कुत्रा' कासा च स्यङा लुटि मस्महे ||६४।। लुटि मस् महे च हुभवति || स्यङा सह कृतः कासा च ॥ कासाहु ॥ वयं करिष्यामः करिष्यामहे ॥
स्यङ स्तिः ॥६५॥ लुटः स्यङः स्सिर्भवति || सुमरिस्सदि* ॥ स्मरिष्यति ॥
[अथ वाचटादिः] "युग्रादिळचटादौ ॥६६॥ ब्राचटादिरपभ्रंशभेदः ॥ तत्र वाचटादौ दोहादौ युक्त-रेफ-समुच्चारणम् ॥ सर्पि || सप्पि' ॥ त्रुद्र प्रभृति प्रयोक्तव्यम् (V. 46) ॥ त्ता एप्पिएप्पिणु (V. 55 )॥
[अथ नागर-उपनागरौ] शेषो नागरे वा स्कादौ ॥६७। स प्राकृतमिश्र उपनागरे गाथादौ महाराष्ट्रयां च° !! [अथ शौरसेनी' ० ]
Vr. XII. 3. He. IV, 260 क-द-ध-भयाः प्रकृत्या वा ' ६८|| मोअइ मोअदि11 मोददे वा। मधुकरि सुरभि मलये ॥ - 1) BC, लोट । 2) P. कृत्र , B. कृङ 3) A लिटः। 4) P. सुमरिस्सिदि । 5) L. अग्रादिः। - 6) Not found in CC1 P. 7) ACCI PL. सपिरेव । सर्पिः। L. सप्पि (:). 8) B. प्रत्यवक्तव्यम् । 9) च is found only in B. 10) Kramadīśvara has not explicitly mentioned the name of Ritaal But Lassen has given these sūtras as forming the characteristics of storat (Vide Lassen's Institutiones Linguae Pracriticae, pp. 50-51, Appendix). 11) Not found in P.
267
Pu. 1X.9 RT. 1I. 1.5

Page #130

-V.761
Hc. IV.271
Vr. XII.9 Pu. IX.39
Vr.XII. 10 Hc. IV. 272 Pu. IX.39 RT. II. I.26
Vr. XII. 10. He. IV.272 RT. II. 1. 26
अपभूशारम्भः जेत्तिकादिवितादेः ॥६६॥ जेत्तिफा तेत्तिका || यावत्। तावत् ॥
तः इ ।।७०॥ जाणि ||
कुलं को दुमः ॥७॥ कदुअ ॥ कृत्वा ॥
गमो मलुक च ॥७२॥ गदुअ || गत्वा ॥
श्चो वा ब्राह्मण्याभिज्ञ-कन्यादिण्यादेः ॥७३॥ Vr. XII. ? बम्हण्णं बम्हं च। अहिजो अहिंचो। फण्णा फंचा ॥
तो लः प्रतेज्ञः ।।७४।। पलिंचा || प्रतिज्ञा ॥
क्लोवे णिर्वा जस्-शसोः ।।७५। . Vr. XII. 11 कुंडाई कुंडाणि वा || कुण्डानि ||
सेर्दो परम् ।।६।। पुरिसादो। महिलादो। अग्गीदो ॥ पुरुषात्। महिलायाः। अग्नेः ॥
Vr.XII. 11
1) PL. येत्तिक etc. 2) P. जानि। 3) P-दोः। 4) ABCCI L. अग्गीहो।

Page #131

७२
सर्वत्र परस्मै || ७७ ||
संकदि ॥
1
भ्रष्ठो चिट्ठी ॥ ७८ ॥
संक्षिप्तसारे प्राकृताध्यायः
2
भोदि । चिट्ठदि ॥ भवति । तिष्ठति ।
अस्तेरस्थि' स्तिङा || ७६||
अत्थि पुरिसो || अस्ति पुरुषः ॥ स्यो है-स-स्सा ||८०||
इदीत यति च ॥८१॥ पढिअदि पढीहदि पढिसदि
पठिष्यति । करिष्यति ॥
Fast मिठा सं नित्यमीङ् च ॥ ८२ ॥ |
करीसं ॥
मागध्यां ष-सोः शः || ८३||
[ अथ मागधी ]
5
6
लोशे । शाहू ॥. रोषः । साधुः ॥
रो लः || ८४||
A

य-प[र] ' - चवर्गगुक्ता मनागुच्चार्याः ||८||
पढिस्सदि । करिअदि करीअदि ॥
Vr. XII. 12. Hc. IV. 269 16.
Pu. IX. 78 RT. II. I. 26 Mk. IX. 108. 137
Vr. XII. 19
[ V. 77
Vr. XI. 3 Pu. XII. 2-3 RT. 11. 2. 13. Mk. XII. 2

Hc. IV. 288
PuXII. 4 Hc. IV. 288
RT. II. 2. 14 Mk. XII. 3
Vr. XI. 5 Pu. XII. 13-14
Mk. XII. 21
1) P. ठिठ्ठौ ।
2 )
P. ठिठ्ठदि । 3 ) P. असेरत्थि
। 4) ABCC
and P. लोश ।
5) BC 1 P. शाहु ।
6 ) This is found in C 7 ) ACC1 यट etc. BP. षट etc. L. यप etc. This has been emended by me ; vide Introduction p. 26.

Page #132

-V. 95]
अपभूशारम्भः
७३
हृदयस्य [हडको'] ॥८६॥ [यो] युक्त-यजयोः ॥८७।
VI. XI. 6 RT.XII.2.22 Mk.XII. 14 Vr.XI. 4. Hc. IV. 292 Pu.XIII.5 RT. II.2. I4 VI. XI. 16 Pu.XII. 15-16 RT. II. 2.20 Mk.XII. 23
को दाणिः ॥८॥
VI. XI. 15. Pu. XII. 37-33 Mk.XII. 34-35 VI. XI. 13 Pu.XII. 29-30 Mk. II. 27-28
Vr.XI. 12 Hc. IV. 299 Pu.XII. 27-28 3 00 Mk.XII. 29 Vr.XI.14 Hc. IV.298 Pu.XII.33
कस्य णिआ ॥८॥ दीर्घः संबुद्धौ । ६०॥ उसो हु-त्वम् अद्-दीर्घश्च वा ।।६ चिट्ठः स्याः ॥६२॥ पैशाचिके च ।।६।। हके हगे चाहमर्थे ॥१४॥ शुटु,' शप्पदो महालायो शाहु-[ हडक्को॰] कय्यं [ वय्य10 ]-यिदाणि बम्हणाहु वअणेण चिट्ठदि। रे देवा! हके णुलिआ11 | सुष्ठ षट्पदः । महाराजः साधुहृदयः फायें वर्जयित्वा ब्राह्मणस्य वचनेन तिष्ठति। रे देव ! अहं नतः13 ॥
[अथ अर्धमागधी] महाराष्ट्री-मिश्रार्धमागधी || ६५ || ।
Vr.XI.9 Hc. IV. 301 Pu. XII.31 RT. II. 2. 12& 28 Mk.XII. 30
__1) ABCCL and P have हृदक्को । L. हलदक्को । This has been emended by me. 2) ABCCI L. ये जायुक्तजययोः। L suggests it in the footnote as योनाद्य युक्त etc. P. स्जो etc. 3) P. दालिः 4) P. निआ। 5) L. जसा हुत्वम् etc. 6) L. छिट्ट (पैशाचिके ). 7) P. शुद्ध। 8) MSS. and P. दृदक्को। 9) P. कस्ज । 10) P. वस्जि MSS. 'not clear. 11) P. णुणिआ। 12) Found only in C

Page #133

७४
संक्षिप्तसारे प्राकृताध्यायः
[V. 96[अथ शबरी] शबरे सोरेत्वम् ॥ ६६॥ एशे मेशे इत्यादि कथंचिभेदा महाराष्ट्रयादेः। शफाभीर-द्राविडो - ड्रावन्त्या-चन्ति-श्रावन्ति -प्राच्य-शौरसेनी- बाह्निकी-दाक्षिणात्यादि-भाषाभेदाश्च नाटफादौ पात्रभेदे च ॥ देशोक्तियथादर्शनमुग्नेया ॥ ____टोका। इयं भाषा महाराष्ट्री-मिश्रार्धमागधी ज्ञातव्या। शबरी महाराष्ट्रीयनोच-जातिभेदः। तत्र तेषां गाथादौ सोः स्थाने एत्वं भवति । एशे मेशे एष मेष इत्यर्थ
इत्यादि |
___ [ देशोक्तिः] १. सोत्प्रासोल्लापन -विस्मयेषु वष्पे ।। २. पुत्तरे योनौ । ३. गौरवे मारिवे ॥ ४. वहिणि-भावुको वयस्यार्थे । ५. सुमित्तो संबन्धे । ६. ' क्रोधोपशमन-प्रोत्साह-प्रसादनेषु मित्त । ७. उणाइ-साह-ढोल्लाः प्रियार्थे ।। ८. अम्हो-अम्हि-अम्हा मात्रार्थे । है. बहिणि-संधि-भग्ग-वुत्त-वज्जघट्टिता संधिता-रण्डा : मन्द
भाग्यासु ॥
1) From "शवरे सोरेत्वं to भेदाः" are not found in B | 2) P. द्रविडोद्राव3) Found in A. 4) After this B adds प्रोत्साह। 5) B. मारिषे 6) प्रसादनेषु मित्त is not found in B. '7) P. अस्मी अस्मि अस्मा मात्रार्थे ।।

Page #134

V. 96.24 ]
अपभूशारम्भः १०. गमेर-गमार-णडजाण-अवट-वेल्ल अविदग्धे ।। ११. भडिल-भण्डा-विअच्छ'-होहो-अहो एअत-ददे संबोधने ।। १२. सुहले सुहे स्त्रियाः ।। १३, रे परिहासे सोधिक्षेपे च ।। १४. अरे विस्मये च ।। १५. मरुउ-हमारि-अहह सकटाक्ष-विस्मये ।। . १६. चल्ली-मत्सी-गमसम-भन्ल-ल्ल-बहेवहे -वहवह - कलकल
वहइ मदन-वेदनायाम् ।। १७. सुहिड विवाविड अणिअइ आविड गौरवातिशये ।। १८. कोच्छी जीविकायाम् ।। १६. ओ निर्देशे।। २०. जे जि इवार्थे । २१. हेज्जत्तं* एवमर्थे । २२, मिए स्वार्थे ।। २३. ढहोण-हत्वत्थविड-वारिअ-मारुआ-सोहा-धुंगा-ओरंग-कन्ल
कन्ली ह्यस्तन-श्वस्तनयोः।। २४. होइ-वट्टइ पर्याप्तौ ।।
1) B. विच्छइ। 2) B. मत्सो । 3) CC, वहुवहु। 4) P. हेज्जातम् ।। 5) P. ढढदि।

Page #135

[V.96.25
. ७६
संक्षिप्तसारे प्राकृताध्यायः २५. समसीस सरिसौ तुल्यतायाम् ।। २६. चिंता-लिखट्टौ व्यसनोपहते ।। २७. खोज्ज मार्गचिह्न । २८. गजईमर परिहासे वसन्ते च ।। २६. अलेह भेंड कृपालेपन-मेखलासु।। ३०. केऊरपुत्तो गो-महिषी-शावके। ३१. उड्ड' अत्युच्चे। ३२. विस्सह-विटाणो गृह-संपर्कयोः ।। ३३. निंदुअ दोषे॥ ३४. ऊद निन्दायाम् ।। ३५. अद्द-अग्गो परिहासे वर्णने च ।। ३६. पीणु गोचरे ।। ३७. सडक मुजार्थे ।। ३८. दहक शोभने । ३६. बहिणि वहित्थ-महिला भगिन्याम् ।। ४०. पात वेधने । ४१. मलुक् कदाचिदर्थे ।। . ४२. छंदिम वैलक्ष्ये ।। ४३. लिंप इच्छायाम् ।। 1) P. षड्ड। 2) P. ऊई। 3) CC1 षडक्क

Page #136

-V.99]
अपभ शौरम्भः ।। ४४. थाम स्थाने ॥ ४५. पहिलः प्रथमे ।। ४६. मज्म उपरि ।। ४७. यदि तत्रार्थे ॥ ४८. चिकिल्ल पिच्छिले ॥ ४६. प्रवेन्ल प्रस्तुतार्थे ।। ५०. कडमड उद्वेगे ॥
इत्यादि देशीसारः ॥ एइ पादपूरणे ॥१७॥ मइ एइ दुजण-वअण-गओ | मया अपि दुर्जन-वचन-गतः ॥ __ एड अनुस्वारयुक्तान्ता लघवश्च ।।८।। कंठे लग्गः पिअ स्सअं॥ टीका। अस्यार्थः। कण्ठे लग्नः प्रियः स्वयम् । कंठे इत्यत्र एकारः। लग्गा इत्यत्र अकारः। पिअ इत्यत्र अकारः। स्सअं इत्यत्र अनुस्वारश्च । एते गुरवो लधवो ज्ञेयाः। तेन पज्झटिकाछन्दसो लघुत्वम् उपपद्यते इति तात्पर्यार्थः ॥
हस्व-दीर्घत्व-स्वशब्दोपाधिर्यथेष्टम् ।।३।। ढोल्ला मिलिआ सा उण स अइ॥ हृस्वत्वम्। मिलिआ ज स तई॥ लोपो दीर्घत्वं च ॥
टीका। अस्यार्थः। प्रिया मिलिता सा। अर्थात् त्वामिति शेषः। पुनः कदाचिद् अर्थे पुनः सा मया मिलिता। मिलिता या सा त्वया ॥
1) Not found in B. 2) P. चिकिन्द पिच्छले। 3) P. घइ । 4) P. मह । 5) अन्त is not found in B. 6) ABC1 P. लग्गु ; but commentary gives लग्ग।

Page #137

७८ . संक्षिप्तसारे प्राकृताध्यायः
[V. 100 . [अथ पैशाचिकी] वर्गाद्यौ त्रि-चतुर्थ योः ॥१०॥ r. X.3 He IV. 325 वर्ग-त्रि-चतुर्थे योः स्थाने वर्गाद्यौ भवतः ॥ लोकानुसारात् पैशाचिके | गगनं ककलं! (V. 103.)। धर्मः खम्मो। जातं चातं । झङ्कारः छकालो। डिम्बः टिंपो । गण्डः फंटो। दुर्गा तुक्का। साधुः साथु । बिसं पिसं । घृतं घृतं। भूतं फूतं ॥ प्राकृतसिद्ध-त्रिचतुर्थ योश्च ||१०१।।
He. IV. 327 - यजनं जजल (V. 103) चचलं (V. 103)॥ क्वचिन्नादौ ॥ सर्ग: शग्गो ||
लुगयः परम् ॥१०२।। यकारस्य परं केवलं लुम् भवति ॥ जयः चओ ॥ नाम्यस्य ॥ काका काको
णनोलः ॥१०३॥
णनोः स्थाने लो भवति ॥ भणति फलति । ध्वनति थुलति। भणितं फलितं। ध्वनितं थ्वलितं ||
प्राकृतणश्च ।। १०४॥ वणं पलं11 ||
1) MSS. and P. ककणं; vide V. 103 for ल। 2) B. धर्मः। 3) L. किङ्कारः चिङ्कालो। 4) B. तिप्पी। 5) Not found in L. 6) B. सिद्धि 7) In P it has been given as a separate sūtra ( No. 104 ). 8) L. Fari: 1 9) In P and L it has been given as a separate सूत्र ( no. 106); but it may be regarded as a वृत्ति। 10) This वृत्ति is not found in ABCC, P. It is found only in L. 11) B. फलं ABCC, पण ।

Page #138

- V. 111 ].
अपभ्रंशारम्भः
राईर्लादिः || १०५||
1
रादेः स्थाने लादिर्भवति ॥ चरणं चललं ' ॥
नो वा || १०६ |
nai nai । वर्ण वञ्ञ ।
|| १०७॥
वे हरिरेव हलियेव । हरिरिव हलियिव ||
हृदयस्य हितअ || १०८ ||
दृढ- हृदयकः । तठ-हितको ||
- भुवः फो- फुरौ ॥ १११ ॥
भूधातोः स्थाने फो- फुरौ भवतः ॥
तुफ - तुप्फौ युष्मदो वा बहुत्वे ।। १०६ ।।
बहुत्वे युष्मदः स्थाने तुंफ-तुप्फौ वा भवतः ॥ यूयं भणथ तुंफ फलह । तुफ वा । तुम्हे वा ॥
अदोम्फः ||११० ।।
बहुत्वेऽस्मदः स्थानेऽफो वा भवति ॥ वयं भणामः अफ
अम्हे वा ॥

७६
Vr. X. 14 Hc. IV. 310

फोति फुरति ॥ भवति ||
as, कष्टम् कस्टं । उष्ट्र उसरो ।
प्रश्न पसणो । स्नानम् सिनाणं
1) PL. चलणं । After this in all the MSS and PL some words, such उष्ण उसणो ( ABCC 1 P ), but (L) कृष्ण कसणो । कार्य कारिअं are given. As all these sutras purview of this rule, they are not included. the characteristics of
।
do not come under the
in the body of the text. These seem to be
महाराष्ट्र ।
फलामो

Page #139

८०
संक्षिप्तसारे प्राकृताध्यायः
प्राकृतवच्छेषम् ||११२ ॥
तिस्सा सिस्सो एहि । एआरो ॥ तस्याः सीमा एत्वादि । व्यवहारः ||
लक्षण - निबद्धा यावत्-संभवाः ||११३||
जडासो तडासो चारिहत्थो, घर' [त] 'इ अग्गे खेडुबुत्तो । [ई] होही घरणि विदोही, सो किस वोल्ल अणाहि णाहित्ति ||
4
ता वहामि ।
इति स्स हसिमो एहि । इति स्म हसाम एषु । तावद् वहामि ।
याद्द्वशस्ताद्गशश्चतुर्हस्तः गृह ं तस्याम्रे तृणस्तम्बः ।
धूता
'गां दुग्ध्वा गृहिणी व्याकुला, सा का वार्ता इदानीं नास्तीत्यर्थः ॥
*

[V. 112-113
*
विद्यातपोऽथ वादीन्द्रः पूर्वग्रामी द्विजः कविः चक्रपाणिसुतो ज्यायान् नप्तासौ श्रीपतेः कृती ||
इति वादीन्द्र - चक्रचूडामणि - महापण्डित - श्रीक्रमदीश्वरकृतौ संक्षिप्तसारे महाराजाधिराज - श्रीजु मरनन्दि - परिशोधितायां रसवत्यां वृत्तावष्टमः पादः समाप्तः । सन्धिपादादिना प्राकृतास्तेन द्वितीयोऽध्यायः ॥
॥ सपूर्णः ॥
1
1) P. शेष : 2) P. घरइ, AC घराण | 3 ) Emended by me. 4) C1 बल्ल |

Page #140